gnucash-docs maint: Multiple changes pushed
John Ralls
jralls at code.gnucash.org
Thu Oct 27 17:10:57 EDT 2016
Updated via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/993790e6 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/81bf95e6 (commit)
from https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/26328123 (commit)
commit 993790e64f8fdf1569dbc6b12774dbbeac264905
Author: goodvibes2 <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
Date: Thu Oct 27 14:43:08 2016 +1100
Whitespace cleanup help
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
index 293d460..bac3d0a 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
@@ -249,9 +249,9 @@
<sect1 id="chart-edit">
<title>Editing a Chart of Accounts</title>
- <para>Editing the Chart of Accounts is done within the <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel>
- pane of the <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog. It is possible to move an account to any
- part of the Chart of Account. It is recommended to keep accounts generally under the related
+ <para>Editing the Chart of Accounts is done within the <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel>
+ pane of the <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog. It is possible to move an account to any
+ part of the Chart of Account. It is recommended to keep accounts generally under the related
types of accounts as described in <xref linkend="acct-types" />. This helps to preserve the Chart
of Accounts structure.</para>
@@ -263,11 +263,11 @@
<sect1 id="acct-create">
<title>Creating a New Account</title>
- <para>To create a new account go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <para>To create a new account go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
or click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon in the Account Tree Window. The <guilabel>New Account</guilabel>
dialog will be opened.</para>
-
- <para>The <guilabel>New Account</guilabel> properties dialog consists of two tabs, the
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>New Account</guilabel> properties dialog consists of two tabs, the
<guilabel>General</guilabel> tab and the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> tab.</para>
<para>Creating a New Account involves planning in advance several details that are
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab is used to access the basic information about the
account. It provides a way of connecting the account to stock information if it is
one of the currency, mutual fund or stock account types. It can also be flagged as
- a <link linkend="accts-placeholder">Placeholder</link> account.
+ a <link linkend="accts-placeholder">Placeholder</link> account.
It displays if it is flagged as a <guilabel>Tax Related</guilabel> account (which
is set through the <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Report
Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialog).</para>
@@ -339,10 +339,10 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>For Accounts containing a <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> and <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis>;
+ <para>For Accounts containing a <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> and <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis>;
first select <guilabel>stock</guilabel> or <guilabel>mutual fund</guilabel> in
the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> panel, then the <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel>, then use
- the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button, to choose the <guilabel>Type</guilabel> (usually the exchange
+ the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button, to choose the <guilabel>Type</guilabel> (usually the exchange
the security is traded on) and security from the <guilabel>Select Security</guilabel> window.</para>
<para>If the required security/fund is not on the list, and you have the correct <guilabel>Type</guilabel> you will need
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@
is traded on) and the name in the <guilabel>Currency/security:</guilabel> drop down list and
<guibutton>Close</guibutton> the screen.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
@@ -385,12 +385,12 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Tax Related</guilabel> check-box means that this account has been
flagged to be included in the Tax Schedule Report. This flag is only displayed on the <guilabel>Edit
- Account</guilabel> dialog and is set in the <guilabel>Income Tax Information</guilabel> dialog
- (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).
+ Account</guilabel> dialog and is set in the <guilabel>Income Tax Information</guilabel> dialog
+ (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).
See the Tax Schedule Report and <acronym>TXF</acronym> Export section in Reports Chapter (<xref linkend="report-general"></xref>).</para>
<para>The check-box <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> marks this account as solely a placeholder in the
hierarchy, it is used to enable a hierarchy or chart of accounts to be setup.</para>
-
+
<note id="accts-placeholder">
<para>A <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> means this
account is not used for transaction data. Transactions may not be posted to this account, only to
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@
<para>The check box <guilabel>Hidden</guilabel> marks this account (and any sub-accounts) to be hidden in
the account tree and not appear in the pop-up account list in the register. To reset this option, you will
first need to open the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Filter By...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- dialog for the account tree and check the <guilabel>show hidden accounts</guilabel> option.
+ dialog for the account tree and check the <guilabel>show hidden accounts</guilabel> option.
Doing so will allow you to select the account and reopen this dialog.</para>
<para>The next pane contains a list of <guilabel>Account Types</guilabel>. Select a type from the
@@ -410,10 +410,10 @@
new account tree select <guilabel>New top level account</guilabel>.
<note>
- <para>The available choices in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane depends on the selected account in the
+ <para>The available choices in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane depends on the selected account in the
<guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> pane. For example if the
- <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> is <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> you will see only <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>
- in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane.
+ <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> is <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> you will see only <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>
+ in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane.
This is to help maintain a proper account structure for the Chart of Accounts.</para>
</note>
</para>
@@ -431,10 +431,10 @@
and check to see if there is any documentation available. If you see the
documentation, then the module is installed, if you do not see the
documentation, then it has not been installed.</para>
-
+
<para>Installing <application>Finance::Quote</application> differs from one operating system to another. For
the various supported systems, you can follow these guidelines:</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Linux:</guilabel> Most linux distributions (like
Fedora, openSuse, Mandriva, Ubuntu, and so on) have a package in their software
@@ -578,13 +578,13 @@
the following to your personal crontab:</para>
<para><userinput>0 18 * * 5 /path/to/gnucash --add-price-quotes /path/to/gnucash-filename > /dev/null 2>&1'</userinput></para>
-
+
<para>For Linux, which needs dbus, usually started by the desktop
manager, to communicate with dconf or gconf:</para>
-
+
<para><userinput>0 18 * * 5 env `dbus-launch` sh -c 'trap "kill $DBUS_SESSION_BUS_PID" EXIT; /path/to/gnucash
--add-price-quotes /path/to/gnucash-filename > /dev/null 2>&1'</userinput></para>
-
+
<para>Remember that Mutual Fund <quote>prices</quote> are really <quote>Net Asset Value</quote>
and require several hours after the exchange closes before being available. If NAVs are downloaded before
the current days NAVs are determined, yesterday’s NAVs are retrieved.</para>
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog consists of just the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab. This tab
has the same information that was described in <xref linkend="acct-create"></xref>.
To access the <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(menu shortcut <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>E</keycap></keycombo>) or
click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon in the Account Tree Window.</para>
</sect1>
@@ -813,8 +813,8 @@
<para>A side effect of removing an account that contains transactions is that you will
end up with unbalanced accounts. This will be indicated in the account by a gray
check-box next to the debit and credit amounts. You can repair automatically these
- unbalanced accounts by using the <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Check &
- Repair</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu. This will automatically assign the unbalanced amounts
+ unbalanced accounts by using the <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Check &
+ Repair</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu. This will automatically assign the unbalanced amounts
to a new account named <emphasis role="bold">Imbalance.
</emphasis></para>
</sect1>
@@ -826,14 +826,14 @@
institution is a way of double checking the accuracy of your (and your banks) transactions and the balance
of your accounts. It also is useful to track uncleared checks and other outstanding transactions.</para>
- <para>The reconciling process in <application>&app;</application> involves two dialogs: the
- <xref linkend="tool-reconcile" /> dialog followed by the <xref linkend="rec-win" /> window. They provide access
- to various <application>&app;</application> functions to make it easy to enter and update
+ <para>The reconciling process in <application>&app;</application> involves two dialogs: the
+ <xref linkend="tool-reconcile" /> dialog followed by the <xref linkend="rec-win" /> window. They provide access
+ to various <application>&app;</application> functions to make it easy to enter and update
account information during the reconciliation.</para>
<tip>
<para>The Reconcile window is accessed from the account tree window or the account register window by
- going to <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ going to <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
or using the menu shortcut <keycombo><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>A</keycap></keycombo>, <keycap>R</keycap>.</para>
</tip>
@@ -850,17 +850,17 @@
<title>Reconciling Information</title>
<para>The <guilabel>Reconcile Information</guilabel> dialog is used to indicate the closing <guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel>
- and the <guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel> (fixed from last reconciliation) and <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel>
+ and the <guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel> (fixed from last reconciliation) and <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel>
from the statement. The <guilabel>Include Sub-accounts</guilabel> check-box is used if one or more subaccounts are used to track
the account you are reconciling. The <guibutton>Enter Interest Payment</guibutton> button is used to add a transfer to the
- accounts for an interest payment. If selected a dialog will be displayed to add the
+ accounts for an interest payment. If selected a dialog will be displayed to add the
<xref linkend="tool-ent-int" /> to the account.</para>
<note>
<para>The <guibutton>Enter Interest Payment</guibutton> button is shown only if you are reconciling an account of
<emphasis>Bank</emphasis> type.</para>
</note>
- <para>When you have entered all relevant data, press <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> to proceed to the
+ <para>When you have entered all relevant data, press <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> to proceed to the
<xref linkend="rec-win" /> dialog or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to discard the reconciliation process.</para>
<sect3 id="tool-ent-int">
@@ -895,21 +895,21 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Reconcile Account</guilabel> pane highlights in the tree the account that the
interest payment will be transferred to or from.</para>
- <para>The <guilabel>Payment From</guilabel> pane contains a list of accounts where you can select the source
+ <para>The <guilabel>Payment From</guilabel> pane contains a list of accounts where you can select the source
account.</para>
-
+
<note>
- <para>If the payment is for a credit or loan account then usually the payment would be from an
- <emphasis>Expense</emphasis> account. If the payment is for a checking or savings account then
+ <para>If the payment is for a credit or loan account then usually the payment would be from an
+ <emphasis>Expense</emphasis> account. If the payment is for a checking or savings account then
usually this would be from an <emphasis>Income</emphasis> account.</para>
</note>
<tip>
- <para>The <guibutton>Show Income/Expense</guibutton> check-box shows or hides the
+ <para>The <guibutton>Show Income/Expense</guibutton> check-box shows or hides the
<emphasis>Income</emphasis> and <emphasis>Expense</emphasis> accounts.</para>
</tip>
- <para>Select <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to enter the interest transaction (or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
+ <para>Select <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to enter the interest transaction (or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
the payment) and return to the initial reconciliation screen.</para>
</sect3>
@@ -923,23 +923,23 @@
<xref linkend="rcn-menu" />.</para>
</note>
- <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is where the actual process of matching your statement
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is where the actual process of matching your statement
to <application>&app;</application> data takes place on a per transaction basis.</para>
- <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is composed by a <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis> and three
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is composed by a <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis> and three
panes; <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> on the left, <guilabel>Funds out</guilabel> on the right and a balance pane.</para>
-
+
<note>
- <para>If you enabled the option <guilabel>Use formal accounting labels</guilabel> in the
- <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> section of the <application>&app;</application> preferences,
- you will see <guilabel>Debits</guilabel> and <guilabel>Credits</guilabel> panes instead of
+ <para>If you enabled the option <guilabel>Use formal accounting labels</guilabel> in the
+ <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> section of the <application>&app;</application> preferences,
+ you will see <guilabel>Debits</guilabel> and <guilabel>Credits</guilabel> panes instead of
<guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> panes.</para>
- </note>
+ </note>
- <para>The <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> pane shows all unreconciled
+ <para>The <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> pane shows all unreconciled
deposits to the account. Both panes are composed by five columns.</para>
<tip>
- <para>To order the listed transactions with a preferred criteria, click on the relevant column header.
+ <para>To order the listed transactions with a preferred criteria, click on the relevant column header.
To reverse the selected order click a second time on the column header.</para>
</tip>
@@ -986,7 +986,7 @@
on the relevant <guilabel>R</guilabel> column.</para>
<note>
- <para>Under each pane a <guilabel>Total</guilabel> for
+ <para>Under each pane a <guilabel>Total</guilabel> for
reconciled transactions is shown.</para>
</note>
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Reconciled Balance</guilabel></term>
+ <term><guilabel>Reconciled Balance</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>The balance of selected transactions.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Difference</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>The difference between the <guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel> and
+ <para>The difference between the <guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel> and
<guilabel>Ending</guilabel> balances.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@
<para>The set of unreconciled transactions in the <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> panes can
be changed by using the menus and <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to access the account and transaction
- information. You can create a <guibutton>New</guibutton> transaction, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> a selected transaction,
+ information. You can create a <guibutton>New</guibutton> transaction, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> a selected transaction,
add a <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> transaction (of the same amount as listed under <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> in the balance pane),
and delete the selected transaction.</para>
@@ -1042,9 +1042,9 @@
</tip>
<para>By pressing the <guilabel>Open</guilabel> icon the register of the account to reconcile will be opened.</para>
-
+
<para>If you wish to postpone the reconciliation until later use the
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Postpone</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Postpone</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
menu item (menu shortcut <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>) or pressing the
<guibutton>Postpone</guibutton> icon. If you wish to cancel the reconciliation use the
<menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item or press the
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@
selected transaction until the <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel> <emphasis>equals</emphasis>
the <guilabel>Reconciled Balance</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> is <emphasis>zero</emphasis>.
Once this is done select the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button or
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(menu shortcut <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap></keycombo>) to finish the reconcile process.</para>
</sect2>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Business.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Business.xml
index 9ca2a29..a69c719 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Business.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Business.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -32,14 +32,14 @@
represented on the balance sheet as an asset, because the expectation is
that you will receive payment soon.</para>
- <para>Accounts Payable (or A/P) refers to products or services bought by your
+ <para>Accounts Payable (or A/P) refers to products or services bought by your
company for which payment has not yet been sent. This is represented on the balance sheet
as a liability because you will have to pay for them.</para>
<sect1 id="busnss-ar-setup1">
<title>Initial Setup</title>
- <para>To set up <application>&app;</application> to handle accounts receivable and accounts payable
+ <para>To set up <application>&app;</application> to handle accounts receivable and accounts payable
for a company the following preliminary steps must be done.
</para>
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
proceed until you see the list of available accounts, select <emphasis>Business
Accounts</emphasis>.</para>
- <note>
+ <note>
<para>The prebuilt Business Account hierarchy will not meet your needs
exactly. You will need to make adjustments for the hierarchy to function
well with your particular situation. It should be close enough that it
@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@
</note>
<!--
- <para>To use <application>&app;</application>’s integrated accounts
+ <para>To use <application>&app;</application>’s integrated accounts
payable system, you must first setup an account of the <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis>
- type. The <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis> account is usually a sub-account
- under Liabilities. It is within this account that the integrated A/P system
+ type. The <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis> account is usually a sub-account
+ under Liabilities. It is within this account that the integrated A/P system
places transactions.</para>
<literallayout>
@@ -79,9 +79,9 @@
-AP Expenses
</literallayout>
- <para>You need to add additional asset accounts and real expense accounts to make
+ <para>You need to add additional asset accounts and real expense accounts to make
this hierarchy useful. The important aspects of this hierarchy are that you need
- an expense account and an Accounts Payable account, with account type set to
+ an expense account and an Accounts Payable account, with account type set to
<emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis>.</para>
-->
@@ -92,10 +92,10 @@
<para>Tax Tables can used to determine the tax for customer invoices (or vendor bills).
</para>
-
+
<para> A tax table can be assigned to an invoice line or bill line.</para>
- <para> The default invoice line tax table can be assigned to each customer and the default bill
+ <para> The default invoice line tax table can be assigned to each customer and the default bill
line tax table can be assigned to each vendor.
</para>
@@ -107,11 +107,11 @@
</menuchoice> tab.
</para>
- <para>Tax Tables are maintained using the <emphasis>Sales Tax Table</emphasis> editor which is accessed via menu
+ <para>Tax Tables are maintained using the <emphasis>Sales Tax Table</emphasis> editor which is accessed via menu
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sales Tax Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
The following fields should be entered:
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> This is the tax table name.</para>
@@ -139,20 +139,20 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-setupcname">
<title>Company Registration</title>
<para>After you have built the account structure and defined your tax tables, register the <application>&app;</application>
- file as belonging to your company by filling in the data requested in
- the <xref linkend="business-book-options" /> accessible from the
+ file as belonging to your company by filling in the data requested in
+ the <xref linkend="business-book-options" /> accessible from the
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item.
</para>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-setup-cntrs">
<title>Counters</title>
-
+
<para>Define the format and last used numbers of codes such as customer,
invoice, vendor, bill, employee, expense voucher, job number and
order.
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@
accessed via <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(<menuchoice><guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).
See <xref linkend="prefs-biz" />.
- </para>
+ </para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="busnss-ar-setupterms">
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@
<note>
<para>As of <application>&app;</application> 2.6.7, Billing terms are only partially supported. Date due is calculated but discount amount is not.</para>
<para>
- Discount for early invoice payment is not implemented. There are 2 ways this may be done, although neither is recommended, and
+ Discount for early invoice payment is not implemented. There are 2 ways this may be done, although neither is recommended, and
professional advise should be used to confirm that regulations are being complied with:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -186,10 +186,10 @@
and split the payment to reduce it by the amount of the discount and a create a compensating split in an income (discount) account.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
- <para>Alternatively, after creating and posting a payment for the discounted amount, create a credit note for the discount using a specific negative
- sales income (discount) account for the transfer account.
+ <para>Alternatively, after creating and posting a payment for the discounted amount, create a credit note for the discount using a specific negative
+ sales income (discount) account for the transfer account.
</para>
</listitem>
@@ -201,12 +201,12 @@
Invoice billing terms will default from the customer billing terms.
Bill billing terms will default from the vendor billing terms.
</para>
-
- <para>Billing Terms are maintained using the Billing Terms Editor which is accessed via menu
+
+ <para>Billing Terms are maintained using the Billing Terms Editor which is accessed via menu
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
The following fields should be entered:
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> The internal name of the billing term. For some examples of billing term names and descriptions see
@@ -256,9 +256,9 @@
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </sect2>
+ </sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="busnss-ar-components1">
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@
-Tax
-Tax on Purchases
-Tax on Sales
-
+
</literallayout>
<note>
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Identification - Customer Number</guilabel> - can be
any number by which you would like to refer to this customer. You
- may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
+ may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@
<para><guilabel>Invoice Information - Invoice ID</guilabel> - the
identification number of this invoice. This is your internal number
for this invoice. If you leave it blank, an invoice number will be
- generated automatically. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" />
+ generated automatically. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" />
for more info</para>
</listitem>
@@ -543,23 +543,23 @@
<para><guilabel>Billing Information - Customer</guilabel> - the
customer who is to receive this invoice. If you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis>
you entered in the <guilabel>New Customer</guilabel> window for this customer,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
- you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
+ you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Billing Information - Job</guilabel> (optional) -
- associates the new invoice with a customer job (see <xref linkend="busnss-ar-jobs1" />).
+ associates the new invoice with a customer job (see <xref linkend="busnss-ar-jobs1" />).
If you remember the <emphasis>job name</emphasis>
- you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Job</guilabel> window. This window is the same to the one described in
- <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the job
- you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ Job</guilabel> window. This window is the same to the one described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the job
+ you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -705,7 +705,7 @@
<listitem>
<para>If Tax included is set (<guilabel>X</guilabel>), then
- subtotal = $95.23 and tax = $4.77. The computation is:
+ subtotal = $95.23 and tax = $4.77. The computation is:
Subtotal = Total / (1+taxrate) and Tax = Total - Subtotal
= Total - (Total / (1+taxrate)).
</para>
@@ -745,7 +745,7 @@
are ready to print it. Posting an invoice places the transactions in an
accounts receivable account.</para>
- <para>The <guilabel>Post Invoice</guilabel> window appears and asks you
+ <para>The <guilabel>Post Invoice</guilabel> window appears and asks you
to enter the following information:</para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -906,7 +906,7 @@
<para>You can change the starting invoice number if it is important you.
Use <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, access
the <guilabel>Counters</guilabel> tab, change the <guilabel>Invoice number</guilabel> value to be
- one less than your desired starting invoice number and click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the
+ one less than your desired starting invoice number and click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button.</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
@@ -940,10 +940,10 @@
<para><guilabel>Owner Info - Customer</guilabel> - the customer for
whom the job is created. If you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis>
you entered in the <guilabel>New Customer</guilabel> window for this customer,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
- you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
+ you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -993,7 +993,7 @@
assign a payment to an invoice during the import process, so this must
be done after transactions have been imported.
</para>
-
+
<para>This can best be done starting from the asset account register
holding the imported payment transaction (like your bank account). In
that account, select the payment, right-click (control-click for Mac OS
@@ -1002,13 +1002,13 @@
transaction. Fill in the missing information like the proper customer
and invoice to complete the payment.
</para>
-
+
<para>One caveat: the logic behind <guilabel>Assign as payment...
</guilabel> won't properly detect credit note reimbursements and will
wrongfully interpret such a transaction as a vendor bill.
</para>
</tip>
-
+
<para>The Process Payment application consists of:</para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -1016,20 +1016,20 @@
<para><guilabel>Payment Information - Customer</guilabel> - the
customer who paid you. If you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis>
you entered in the <guilabel>New Customer</guilabel> window for this customer,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
- you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ Customer</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer
+ you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Payment Information - Invoice</guilabel> - the invoice
for which payment was received. If you remember the <emphasis>invoice ID</emphasis>,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Invoice</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoicefind2" />. Highlight the invoice
- you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ Invoice</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoicefind2" />. Highlight the invoice
+ you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1063,49 +1063,49 @@
money will be deposited (a checking account for example).</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-ar-overpay2">
<title>Over Payments or Pre-Payments</title>
-
+
<para>If a customer overpays an invoice or pays for goods or services before
they have been invoiced, Process Payment for the total amount received.
<application>&app;</application> will then keep track of the over-payment
(or pre-payment) in the A/R account and you can use the residual when
paying the next invoice.
</para>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="busnss-ar-partpay2">
<title>Partial Payments</title>
-
+
<para>Partial payments are possible too. Select the invoice to pay.
<application>&app;</application> will automatically suggest that invoice's
remaining balance as payment amount. Simply adjust that amount to what you
want to pay.
</para>
-
+
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-ar-baddebt">
<title>Writing Off a Bad Debt</title>
<note><para>Please check with your accountant to ensure the following is
acceptable in your region.</para>
</note>
-
+
<para>The usual way to do this is to process a payment for the invoice to a
<emphasis>BadDebt</emphasis> account. Such an account would be an expense
account. However, in <application>&app;</application>, you can't process a
payment for an invoice directly to an expense account, so it takes two
steps:
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Pay the invoice to an asset or liability account, such as
your checking account.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para>Change the asset or liability account, in the <emphasis>
non</emphasis> Accounts Receivable split of the payment transaction, to
the BadDebt expense account.</para>
@@ -1114,46 +1114,46 @@
</itemizedlist>
<para>Specifically</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Remove all transactions from the A/R account related to
the invoice, except for the invoice's transaction itself. This includes
any payment transactions, and transactions between your BadDebt and A/R
account.</para>
-
+
<para>In case the payment has associated lot link transactions
<link linkend="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot">(1)</link>, remove those as well.
</para>
-
+
<para>If all is well, your <guilabel>Process Payment</guilabel> window
for this customer should list the invoice the customer won't pay, and
no prepayments.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para>Pay your invoice to an arbitrary asset or liability
account. It can be your checking account. We will fix that in the next
step.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para>Open the account register for your A/R account. For this
invoice there should now be one payment transaction. If you are using
<application>&app;</application> 2.6.0 - 2.6.4 there will also be one
lot link transaction <link linkend="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot">(1)</link>.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para> Select the payment transaction and change the transfer
account to your <emphasis>BadDebt</emphasis> account. Make sure to leave
the transaction (eg by clicking on another transaction) to save the
changes.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>If all is well, your <guilabel>Process Payment</guilabel> window
should still be clean: no pre-payments, and the bad debt invoice gone.
</para>
-
+
<note id="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot"><para>(1): <application>&app;</application>
versions 2.6.0 to 2.6.4 created lot link transactions which show in the
A/R account register. This came with its own set of subtle issues. It is
@@ -1163,15 +1163,15 @@
Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Check & Repair</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice> on your A/R and A/P accounts to clean up most of the lot
link legacy. Don't forget to make a backup first just in case.</para>
-
+
<para>Lots are used internally for relating payments to invoices. Lots
- themselves are invisible in the account registers.
- To see them you need to open the lot viewer, which can be found in
+ themselves are invisible in the account registers.
+ To see them you need to open the lot viewer, which can be found in
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>View lots
</guimenuitem></menuchoice> while in any A/R or A/P account register.
- Select a lot to see the <emphasis>Splits in lot</emphasis>.
+ Select a lot to see the <emphasis>Splits in lot</emphasis>.
</para>
-
+
<para><emphasis>Lot links</emphasis> are <emphasis>transactions</emphasis>
which you can see in your A/R and A/P accounts. They are unusual in the
sense that all their splits are in one account (A/R or A/P). Each split
@@ -1180,14 +1180,14 @@
</para>
</note>
-
+
<para>See <ulink
url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Business_Features_Issues"
/> for more information.
</para>
-
+
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="busnss-ar-invoicechange">
@@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@
<guimenuitem>Style Sheets</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and select the <guibutton>New</guibutton>
button in the <guilabel>Select HTML Style Sheet</guilabel> window that will appear.</para>
- <para>Give a <guilabel>Name</guilabel> to the new style sheet (e.g. <guilabel>Custom Invoice</guilabel>) and select the
+ <para>Give a <guilabel>Name</guilabel> to the new style sheet (e.g. <guilabel>Custom Invoice</guilabel>) and select the
<guilabel>Fancy</guilabel> <guilabel>Template</guilabel>. When you click the
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, the <guilabel>HTML Style Sheet Properties</guilabel> window is
displayed. This window presents you five sections listed in the left pane: <guilabel>Colors</guilabel>, <guilabel>Fonts</guilabel>,
@@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@
</sect1>
-<!-- start of A/P
+<!-- start of A/P
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
-->
@@ -1265,12 +1265,12 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
sub-menu.
</para>
-
+
<para>These A/P components are:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Vendors</guilabel> are people or companies from which you buy
+ <para><guilabel>Vendors</guilabel> are people or companies from which you buy
products or services on credit.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1280,12 +1280,12 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Jobs</guilabel> (optional) is where you register Vendor Jobs.
+ <para><guilabel>Jobs</guilabel> (optional) is where you register Vendor Jobs.
Jobs are mechanism by which you can group multiple bills from a particular vendor.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Process Payments</guilabel> is where you register payments to a
+ <para><guilabel>Process Payments</guilabel> is where you register payments to a
vendor to whom you owe money.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1295,34 +1295,34 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<sect1 id="busnss-ap-vendors1">
<title>Vendors</title>
- <para>A vendor is a company or person from whom you purchase goods or services.
+ <para>A vendor is a company or person from whom you purchase goods or services.
Vendors must be registered within the A/P system.</para>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-ap-vendornew2">
<title>New</title>
<para>To register a new vendor, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu>
- <guimenuitem>New Vendor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. Fill in general information about the vendor,
+ <guimenuitem>New Vendor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. Fill in general information about the vendor,
such as Company Name, Address, Phone, Fax, etc. Below is a list of the other options: </para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Identification - Vendor Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Vendor Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would
like to refer to this vendor. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> - differentiates active vendors from inactive
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> - differentiates active vendors from inactive
ones. This is useful when you have many past vendors, and you want to see only those marked active.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Name</guilabel> - is the contact name of the person to
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Name</guilabel> - is the contact name of the person to
receive payments you make.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel> - records any additional comments about the vendor.
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel> - records any additional comments about the vendor.
Use it to track names of contact people within the vendor’s company, for example.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1337,14 +1337,14 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> - specifies the default payment terms
- for this vendor. Payment terms must be preregistered using
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> - specifies the default payment terms
+ for this vendor. Payment terms must be preregistered using
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Included</guilabel> - specifies if tax is included
- in bills from this vendor. You can choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>, <guilabel>No</guilabel>,
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Included</guilabel> - specifies if tax is included
+ in bills from this vendor. You can choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>, <guilabel>No</guilabel>,
or <guilabel>Use Global</guilabel>.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -1361,16 +1361,16 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
made in the global preferences accessible through
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- (<menuchoice><guimenu>Gnucash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ (<menuchoice><guimenu>Gnucash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
on Mac OS X).</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Table</guilabel> - specifies a default tax
- table to apply to bills from this vendor. Tax tables must be registered using the
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Table</guilabel> - specifies a default tax
+ table to apply to bills from this vendor. Tax tables must be registered using the
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
menu item.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1399,7 +1399,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
regardless of new search criteria.</para>
<tip>
- <para>To return a list of all registered active vendors, set the search criterion to
+ <para>To return a list of all registered active vendors, set the search criterion to
<guilabel>matches regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area.
Make sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click <guibutton>Find</guibutton>.
The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match anything.</para>
@@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<sect1 id="busnss-ap-bills1">
<title>Bills</title>
<para>A bill is a request for payment you receive from a vendor. <application>&app;</application> can track bills.</para>
-
+
<para>A credit note is the document you receive from a vendor to correct
products or services rendered that you were incorrectly charged for on a bill. <application>&app;</application> can generate and track
credit notes via the same menu entries as bills.</para>
@@ -1441,19 +1441,19 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Billing Info - Vendor</guilabel> - the issuing vendor. If you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis>
you entered in the <guilabel>New Vendor</guilabel> window for this vendor,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Vendor</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with a click
+ Vendor</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with a click
in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Billing Info - Job</guilabel> (optional) - associates a vendor job (see <xref linkend="busnss-ap-jobs1" />) with this bill.
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Info - Job</guilabel> (optional) - associates a vendor job (see <xref linkend="busnss-ap-jobs1" />) with this bill.
If you remember the <emphasis>job name</emphasis>
- you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Job</guilabel> window. This window is very similar to the one described in
- <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the job you are looking for with a click
+ Job</guilabel> window. This window is very similar to the one described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the job you are looking for with a click
in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -1473,11 +1473,11 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<para>When you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> the <guilabel>Edit Bill</guilabel> opens.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="busnss-ap-billedit2">
- <title>Edit</title>
+ <title>Edit</title>
<para>From the Edit Bill window you can enter an itemized list of
goods and services you purchased, in a manner similar to how the account
register works. For credit notes you enter an itemized list of goods and
- services the vendor refunded instead.</para>
+ services the vendor refunded instead.</para>
<para>There are 12 columns in the Invoice Entries area:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Due Date</guilabel> - is the date on which payment for the bill is expected.</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>If you specified payment terms when you created the bill,
@@ -1653,13 +1653,13 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<sect1 id="busnss-ap-payment1">
<title>Process Payment</title>
<para>Eventually, you need to pay your bills. To do so, use the Process Payment application found in <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Process Payment</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
+
<tip>
<para>There is an alternative way of assigning a payment to (one or more)
bills where the payment transaction already exists, say in the case
where transactions are imported from a bank.
</para>
-
+
<para>This can best be done starting from the asset account register
holding the imported payment transaction (like your bank account). In
that account, select the payment, right-click (control-click for Mac OS
@@ -1668,28 +1668,28 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
transaction. Fill in the missing information like the proper vendor
and bill to complete the payment.
</para>
-
+
<para>One caveat: the logic behind <guilabel>Assign as payment...
</guilabel> won't properly detect credit note reimbursements and will
wrongfully interpret such a transaction as a customer invoice.
</para>
</tip>
-
+
<para>The Process Payment application consists of:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Payment Information - Vendor</guilabel> - the vendor you wish to pay. If you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis>
you entered in the <guilabel>New Vendor</guilabel> window for this vendor,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Vendor</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with a click
+ Vendor</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with a click
in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Payment Information - Bill</guilabel> - the bill you wish to pay. If you remember the <emphasis>bill ID</emphasis>,
- start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
+ start to type it in this field and <application>&app;</application> will try auto complete
it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find
- Bill</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-billfind2" />. Highlight the bill you are looking for with a click
+ Bill</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-billfind2" />. Highlight the bill you are looking for with a click
in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button in the search window.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -1712,10 +1712,10 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
comes from, such as a checking account.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-ap-overpay2">
<title>Over Payments or Pre-Payments</title>
-
+
<para>If you wish to overpay an invoice or pay for goods or services before
they have been invoiced, Process Payment for the total amount payed.
<application>&app;</application> will then keep track of the over-payment
@@ -1726,29 +1726,29 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<sect2 id="busnss-ap-partpay2">
<title>Partial Payments</title>
-
+
<para>You may wish to partially pay a bill. Select the bill to pay.
<application>&app;</application> will automatically suggest that bill's
remaining balance as payment amount. Simply adjust that amount to what you
want to pay.
- </para>
+ </para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="busnss-emply">
<title>Employees</title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> can help your company by tracking employees. You can register a
+ <para><application>&app;</application> can help your company by tracking employees. You can register a
<xref linkend="busnss-emplynew" />, <xref linkend="busnss-emplyedit" /> existing employees, create
<xref linkend="busnss-emply-newvchr" /> and <xref linkend="busnss-emply-editvchr" />.</para>
-
- <para>Expense voucher are used to reimburse employees for authorized expenses (f.e. travels, parking, food etc...).
+
+ <para>Expense voucher are used to reimburse employees for authorized expenses (f.e. travels, parking, food etc...).
Employees credit notes are the opposite of expense vouchers.</para>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-emplynew">
<title>New Employee</title>
<para>To register a new employee, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu>
- <guimenuitem>New Employee</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. The <guilabel>New Employee</guilabel>
+ <guimenuitem>New Employee</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. The <guilabel>New Employee</guilabel>
window will open with two tabs:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><xref linkend="mply-tab1" /></para></listitem>
@@ -1758,18 +1758,18 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<itemizedlist id="mply-tab1">
<title>Employee tab</title>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Identification - Employee Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Employee Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would
like to refer to this vendor. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Identification - Username</guilabel> (Mandatory) - a unique username to identify the employee.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> (Optional) - differentiates active employees from inactive
- ones. This is useful when you have many past employees, and you want to see only those marked
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> (Optional) - differentiates active employees from inactive
+ ones. This is useful when you have many past employees, and you want to see only those marked
<guilabel>Active</guilabel>.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1780,21 +1780,21 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Payment Address - Address</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the address of the employee.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Payment Address - Phone, Fax, Email</guilabel> (Optional)- others optionals contact information for the employee.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Interface - Language</guilabel> (Optional) - </para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - specifies the default payment terms
- for this employee. Payment terms must be preregistered using
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - specifies the default payment terms
+ for this employee. Payment terms must be preregistered using
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Billing - Default Hours per Day</guilabel> (Optional) - </para>
</listitem>
@@ -1819,14 +1819,14 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<itemizedlist id="mply-tab2">
<title>Access Control tab</title>
<listitem>
<para>Access Control List</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="busnss-emplyedit">
@@ -1842,8 +1842,8 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
results. The current result set is searched when the <guilabel>Refine
Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, <application>&app;</application>
selects this option for you after you run the initial search.</para>
-
- <note>
+
+ <note>
<para>If the employee you are searching for does not match the supplied
search criteria, change the search criteria, click the <guilabel>New
Search</guilabel> radio button and then the <guibutton>Find</guibutton>
@@ -1854,7 +1854,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</note>
<tip>
- <para>To return a list of all registered active employees, set the search criterion to
+ <para>To return a list of all registered active employees, set the search criterion to
<guilabel>matches regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area.
Make sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click <guibutton>Find</guibutton>.
The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match anything.</para>
@@ -1864,72 +1864,72 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
<sect2 id="busnss-emply-newvchr">
<title>New Expense Voucher/Credit Note</title>
<para>To register a new expense voucher/ Credit Note, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu>
- <guimenuitem>New Expense Voucher...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. The <guilabel>New Expense Voucher</guilabel>
+ <guimenuitem>New Expense Voucher...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item. The <guilabel>New Expense Voucher</guilabel>
window will open. You can enter the following data:</para>
<itemizedlist>
-
+
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Type</guilabel> (Optional) - select if you are entering
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Type</guilabel> (Optional) - select if you are entering
a Voucher or a credit note.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Voucher ID</guilabel> (Optional) - can be any number by which you would
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Voucher ID</guilabel> (Optional) - can be any number by which you would
like to refer to this voucher. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Date opened</guilabel> - the date of the voucher. Click on
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Date opened</guilabel> - the date of the voucher. Click on
the button on the right of the date to open a calendar.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Billing information - Employee</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the employee to which
- voucher refers.</para>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Employee</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the employee to which
+ voucher refers.</para>
<tip>
<para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing <application>&app;</application>
- will try to complete the text automatically using existing employees name. You can also press the button
- <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-emplyedit">Find Employee</link>
+ will try to complete the text automatically using existing employees name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-emplyedit">Find Employee</link>
window.</para>
</tip>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Billing information - Billing ID</guilabel> (Optional) - the identification number
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Billing ID</guilabel> (Optional) - the identification number
of the document (f.e. the bill number for a dinner).</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Billing information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - the pay back terms agreement
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - the pay back terms agreement
for this bill. A list of registered terms is available within the pop up menu.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Customer</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer
+ <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Customer</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer
to wich voucher refers.</para>
<tip>
<para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing <application>&app;</application>
- will try to complete the text automatically using existing Customer name. You can also press the button
- <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find Customer</link>
+ will try to complete the text automatically using existing Customer name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find Customer</link>
window.</para>
</tip>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Job</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer Job
+ <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Job</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer Job
to wich voucher refers.</para>
<note>
- <para> you can type in this field only if there is one or more job registered in
+ <para> you can type in this field only if there is one or more job registered in
<application>&app;</application> belonging to the selected Customer.</para>
</note>
<tip>
<para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing <application>&app;</application>
- will try to complete the text automatically using existing Customer name. You can also press the button
- <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find Customer</link>
+ will try to complete the text automatically using existing Customer name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find Customer</link>
window.</para>
</tip>
</listitem>
@@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="busnss-emply-editvchr">
<title>Find and Edit Expense Voucher/Credit Note</title>
@@ -1957,8 +1957,8 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
results. The current result set is searched when the <guilabel>Refine
Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, <application>&app;</application>
selects this option for you after you run the initial search.</para>
-
- <note>
+
+ <note>
<para>If the expense voucher you are searching for does not match the supplied
search criteria, change the search criteria, click the <guilabel>New
Search</guilabel> radio button and then the <guibutton>Find</guibutton>
@@ -1969,7 +1969,7 @@ ________________________________________________________________________________
</note>
<tip>
- <para>To return a list of all expense vouchers, set the search criterion to
+ <para>To return a list of all expense vouchers, set the search criterion to
<guilabel>matches regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area.
Make sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click <guibutton>Find</guibutton>.
The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match anything.</para>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Customize.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Customize.xml
index c4d77e4..edc09c6 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Customize.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Customize.xml
@@ -45,15 +45,15 @@
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="set-prefs">
<title>Setting Preferences</title>
- <para>The <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window allows you to customize your <application>&app;</application>
+ <para>The <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window allows you to customize your <application>&app;</application>
session by setting several options. From the <application>&app;</application> menu
select <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(<menuchoice><guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).
- The <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window will open.
+ The <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window will open.
Using the tabs on the left make your desired changes. The settings in
this dialog are set per user and not stored with the file. This is
in contrast to the settings described in <xref linkend="book-options"/>,
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
</tip>
<note>
<para>The changes you make will be applied at once.</para>
- </note>
+ </note>
<para>To close the <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window press the
<guibutton>Close</guibutton> button.</para>
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Include non-currency totals</guilabel> — if this
- option is selected, <application>&app;</application> will include in the <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> a total
+ option is selected, <application>&app;</application> will include in the <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> a total
for non-currency items (for instance number of shares).</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Accnts.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Accounts tab</phrase>
</textobject>
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
<keycap>:</keycap> (Colon), but you can also select
<keycap>/</keycap> (Slash),
<keycap>\</keycap> (Backslash), <keycap>—</keycap> (Dash)
- or <keycap>.</keycap> (Period), or any Unicode character
+ or <keycap>.</keycap> (Period), or any Unicode character
that isn’t a letter or a number.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
<para><guilabel>Income & Expense</guilabel> assigns a
positive credit balance to income account balances and a
negative debit balance to expense account balances. See
- <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information
+ <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information
on these account types.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@
<para><guilabel>Credit accounts</guilabel> (default) displays
a positive balance for account types that would normally carry
a credit balance (income, credit, liability, equity). See
- <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information on
+ <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information on
these account types.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Labels</guilabel> — Select this option if you want
- column headings in the register to refer to <guilabel>debits</guilabel> and
+ column headings in the register to refer to <guilabel>debits</guilabel> and
<guilabel>credits</guilabel> instead of the default informal headings such
as <guilabel>withdrawal</guilabel>
and <guilabel>deposit</guilabel>.</para>
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Locale</guilabel> — Use the system locale currency for
+ <para><guilabel>Locale</guilabel> — Use the system locale currency for
all newly created accounts.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -243,10 +243,10 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Account Color</guilabel> — This option
- lets you manage the display of the account color set in the
+ lets you manage the display of the account color set in the
<guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> window:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Show the Account Colors on tabs</guilabel> — show the accounts
+ <para><guilabel>Show the Account Colors on tabs</guilabel> — show the accounts
color as background in the account register tabs.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -307,8 +307,8 @@
should be accumulated into a single split by default.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
-
+ </listitem>
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Invoices</guilabel></para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -324,11 +324,11 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Auto pay on posting</guilabel> — If enabled, at post
- time automatically attempt to pay customer documents with outstanding
+ <para><guilabel>Auto pay on posting</guilabel> — If enabled, at post
+ time automatically attempt to pay customer documents with outstanding
pre-payments and counter documents.</para>
<note>
- <para>Counter documents are documents with
+ <para>Counter documents are documents with
opposite sign. For example for an invoice, customer credit notes and negative
invoices are considered counter documents.</para>
@@ -344,12 +344,12 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Notify when due</guilabel> — Lets you set whether
- you want to be notified at <application>&app;</application> startup
+ you want to be notified at <application>&app;</application> startup
of when a bill is soon to be due.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Days in advance</guilabel> — How many days before
+ <para><guilabel>Days in advance</guilabel> — How many days before
the due date to warn about bills coming due.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -360,11 +360,11 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Auto pay on posting</guilabel> — If enabled, at post
- time automatically attempt to pay vendor documents with outstanding
+ <para><guilabel>Auto pay on posting</guilabel> — If enabled, at post
+ time automatically attempt to pay vendor documents with outstanding
pre-payments and counter documents.</para>
<note>
- <para>Counter documents are documents with
+ <para>Counter documents are documents with
opposite sign. For example for a bill, vendor credit notes and negative
bills are considered counter documents.</para>
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="prefs-date-time">
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Use 24-hour clock</guilabel> — Lets you specify if you
- want to use 24 or 12 hours time format. That is if 11 o’clock at
+ want to use 24 or 12 hours time format. That is if 11 o’clock at
night should be represented as 11PM or 23:00.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -442,16 +442,16 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Date completion</guilabel> — This option
- lets you manage the case when a date is entered without a year:
+ lets you manage the case when a date is entered without a year:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>In the current calendar year</guilabel> (Default) — Dates will be completed so that
+ <para><guilabel>In the current calendar year</guilabel> (Default) — Dates will be completed so that
they are within the current calendar year.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>In a sliding 12-month window starting a configurable number of months before
- the current month</guilabel> — Dates will be completed so that they are close to the current
+ <para><guilabel>In a sliding 12-month window starting a configurable number of months before
+ the current month</guilabel> — Dates will be completed so that they are close to the current
date. You can enter the maximum number of months to go backwards in time when completing dates.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@
<para><guilabel>General</guilabel></para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Display "Tip of the Day" dialog</guilabel> — This option displays or hides the
+ <para><guilabel>Display "Tip of the Day" dialog</guilabel> — This option displays or hides the
<guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> screen when <application>&app;</application> is started.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -502,7 +502,7 @@
<para><guilabel>Perform account list setup on new file</guilabel> —
This option turns off the display of the <guilabel>New Account
Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant when the entry <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is selected from the
+ <guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> is selected from the
<application>&app;</application> menu.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@
to set the number of decimal places to be used.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Files</guilabel></para>
@@ -587,15 +587,15 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Enable timout on "Save changes on closing" question</guilabel> —
- If enabled, the <guilabel>Save changes on closing</guilabel> question will only wait a
+ If enabled, the <guilabel>Save changes on closing</guilabel> question will only wait a
limited number of seconds for an answer. If the user didn’t answer within that time,
the changes will be saved automatically and the question window closed.
- You can sete the number of seconds in the <guilabel>Time to wait for answer</guilabel> field.</para>
+ You can sete the number of seconds in the <guilabel>Time to wait for answer</guilabel> field.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Retain log files</guilabel> — In this section you could set
- your preferences about the log files using the provided radio buttons.</para>
+ your preferences about the log files using the provided radio buttons.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Never</guilabel> — Disable the creation of log files.</para>
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@
search" if fewer than this number of items is returned.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
@@ -663,8 +663,8 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Default transaction status (overridden by the status given by the QIF file)</guilabel> —
- In this section you could set the default status for imported transactions using the provided
- self-explainingradio buttons:</para>
+ In this section you could set the default status for imported transactions using the provided
+ self-explainingradio buttons:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Not cleared</guilabel> (Default)</para>
@@ -694,8 +694,8 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Enable update match action</guilabel> — Enable the UPDATE AND RECONCILE
- action in the transaction matcher. If enabled, a transaction whose best match’s score is
- above the Auto-CLEAR threshold and has a different date or amount than the matching existing
+ action in the transaction matcher. If enabled, a transaction whose best match’s score is
+ above the Auto-CLEAR threshold and has a different date or amount than the matching existing
transaction will cause the existing transaction to be updated and cleared by default.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -732,13 +732,13 @@
$100, and you are charged $101.50 plus Interac fees. If you manually entered
that $100, the amounts won’t match. You should set this to whatever is the
maximum such fee in your area (in units of your local currency), so the
- transaction will be recognized as a match by
+ transaction will be recognized as a match by
<application>&app;</application>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Automatically create new commodities</guilabel> — Enables the
- automatic creation of new commodities if any unknown commodity is encountered during
+ <para><guilabel>Automatically create new commodities</guilabel> — Enables the
+ automatic creation of new commodities if any unknown commodity is encountered during
import. If not enabled, the user will be asked what to do with each unknown commodity.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -752,7 +752,7 @@
</note>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Close log window when finished</guilabel> — Close the log window
+ <para><guilabel>Close log window when finished</guilabel> — Close the log window
when the operation is completed.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@
banking operations.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
@@ -860,9 +860,9 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Tab order includes Transfer on Memorised Transaction</guilabel> —
- If selected, when the transaction is auto filled, pressing the
- <keycap>Tab</keycap> key in the register the cursor’s jump
+ <para><guilabel>Tab order includes Transfer on Memorised Transaction</guilabel> —
+ If selected, when the transaction is auto filled, pressing the
+ <keycap>Tab</keycap> key in the register the cursor’s jump
will include the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -890,7 +890,7 @@
selected, after reconciling a credit card statement, prompt the user
to enter a credit card payment.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Always reconcile to today</guilabel> — If
selected, always open the reconcile screen with today’s date for
@@ -902,13 +902,13 @@
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Graphics</guilabel></para>
<itemizedlist>
-
+
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Use system theme colors</guilabel> — If selected,
+ <para><guilabel>Use system theme colors</guilabel> — If selected,
the system color theme will be applied to register windows. Otherwise
the original <application>&app;</application> register color will be used.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Double mode colors alternate with
transactions</guilabel> — If selected, configures the register
@@ -1009,7 +1009,7 @@
</para>
</warning>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Number of transactions</guilabel> — How many
transactions to show in a register. Set to 0 to show all transactions.</para>
@@ -1053,15 +1053,15 @@
reports. You can choose:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Locale</guilabel> — Use the system locale currency for all
+ <para><guilabel>Locale</guilabel> — Use the system locale currency for all
newly created reports.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Choose</guilabel> — Use the specified currency for all
+ <para><guilabel>Choose</guilabel> — Use the specified currency for all
newly created reports.</para>
</listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
+ </itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -1188,18 +1188,18 @@
a small close icon on each tab, to make it easier to close the
various tabs.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Bring the most recent tab to the front</guilabel> — If
selected, the newly created tab will be shown over the other tabs.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Width:</guilabel> — The width of tab label
+ <para><guilabel>Width:</guilabel> — The width of tab label
expressed in characters.
<note>
- <para>If the text in the tab is longer than this value
- (the test is approximate) then the tab label will have the middle cut
+ <para>If the text in the tab is longer than this value
+ (the test is approximate) then the tab label will have the middle cut
and replaced with an ellipsis.
</para>
</note>
@@ -1207,14 +1207,14 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Tab Position</guilabel></para>
<para>Position the tabs at the
<guilabel>Top</guilabel> (default), <guilabel>Bottom</guilabel>,
<guilabel>Left</guilabel> or <guilabel>Right</guilabel>.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Summary Bar Position</guilabel></para>
<para>Position the Summary Bar at the
@@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@
changes are reflected in the affected areas of <application>&app;</application>
as soon as the button is pressed, so it can be used to 'see' the effect
of a given option without having to re-open the dialog. The
- <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button is not sensitive on the dialog if
+ <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button is not sensitive on the dialog if
it appears during transaction import (that is, 'new book') situations.
The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button behaves like the
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button except that it immediately
@@ -1283,7 +1283,7 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab of this dialog allows
the selection of options that affect how accounting registers function.
</para>
-
+
<sect3 id="trading-accounts-book-option">
<title>Use Trading Accounts</title>
@@ -1312,7 +1312,7 @@
<note>
<para>This option is only available in <application>&app;
</application> version 2.6 or later.</para>
- </note>
+ </note>
<para>Check the <guilabel>Use Split Action Field for Number</guilabel>
checkbox to have the split action field of the anchor split used for
the 'Num' column in registers, reports and import/export functions,
@@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Business</guilabel> tab allows you to enter values
that are in turn used by the business features of <application>&app;</application>:</para>
-
+
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term>Company Name</term>
@@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@
<varlistentry>
<term>Fancy Date Format</term>
- <listitem><para>The default date format used for fancy printed dates
+ <listitem><para>The default date format used for fancy printed dates
(e.g. on invoices).</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -1498,14 +1498,14 @@
the number to be printed with leading zeros and 5 characters wide, you
would enter "C - %05li" and the next customer number would be assigned
the number "C - 00006".</para>
-
+
<note><para>For historical reasons <application>&app;</application> accepts multiple format specifiers
although they all yield the same end result. You can choose "li", "lli" or I64i".</para>
</note>
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="change-style">
<title>Changing Style Sheets</title>
@@ -1521,14 +1521,14 @@
the report(s) are currently displayed.</para></note>
<para>To add a new Style Sheet click the <guibutton>New...</guibutton> button in the Style Sheet pane.
- The <guilabel>New Style Sheet</guilabel> dialog will appear. Fill in the <guilabel>name</guilabel> field with
+ The <guilabel>New Style Sheet</guilabel> dialog will appear. Fill in the <guilabel>name</guilabel> field with
the name of the new Style Sheet and choose a template. To remove a Style Sheet select the Style Sheet from
the list and click <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>.</para>
<sect2 id="style-default">
<title>Default Style Sheet</title>
- <para>The Default Style Sheet has four tabs to alter the appearance of
+ <para>The Default Style Sheet has four tabs to alter the appearance of
reports utilizing it, Colors, Fonts, General and Tables. </para>
<sect3 id="style-def-color">
@@ -1536,7 +1536,7 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
color picker to choose a color that will be applied to alternate
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1548,17 +1548,17 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
Titles.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Account Links.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1568,12 +1568,12 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Text Cells.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
size for Total Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1594,17 +1594,17 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
to choose a new background color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Background Pixmap:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button
+ <para><guilabel>Background Pixmap:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button
to select a picture to use as the background in reports.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable
+ <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable
blue hyperlinks in reports.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1620,12 +1620,12 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
between table cell edges and contents</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of
+ <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of
the borders on tables.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1636,7 +1636,7 @@
<sect2 id="style-easy">
<title>Easy Style Sheet</title>
- <para>The Easy Style Sheet has five tabs to alter the appearance of
+ <para>The Easy Style Sheet has five tabs to alter the appearance of
reports: Colors, Fonts, General, Images and Tables.</para>
<sect3 id="style-easy-colors">
@@ -1644,12 +1644,12 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
to choose a new background color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new text color.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1659,29 +1659,29 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new link color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
color picker to choose a new color for alternate table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
picker to choose a new color for grand total rows.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1692,17 +1692,17 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
Titles.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Account Links.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1712,17 +1712,17 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Header table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Text Cells.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
size for Total Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1743,7 +1743,7 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing
+ <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing
the report.
</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
between table cell edges and contents</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1819,8 +1819,8 @@
<sect2 id="style-footer">
<title>Footer Style Sheet</title>
- <para>The Footer Style Sheet has the same five tabs to alter the
- appearance of reports as the Easy Style Sheets: Colors, Fonts, General,
+ <para>The Footer Style Sheet has the same five tabs to alter the
+ appearance of reports as the Easy Style Sheets: Colors, Fonts, General,
Images and Tables.</para>
<sect3 id="style-footer-colors">
@@ -1828,12 +1828,12 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
to choose a new background color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new text color.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1843,29 +1843,29 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new link color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
color picker to choose a new color for alternate table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
picker to choose a new color for grand total rows.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -1876,17 +1876,17 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
Titles.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Account Links.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1896,17 +1896,17 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Header table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Text Cells.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
size for Total Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1927,7 +1927,7 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing
+ <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing
the report.
</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1993,7 +1993,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
between table cell edges and contents</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2008,7 +2008,7 @@
<sect2 id="style-technicolor">
<title>Technicolor Style Sheet</title>
- <para>The Technicolor Style Sheet has has five tabs to alter the
+ <para>The Technicolor Style Sheet has has five tabs to alter the
appearance of reports: Colors, Fonts, General, Images and Tables.</para>
<sect3 id="style-tech-colors">
@@ -2016,12 +2016,12 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker
to choose a new background color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new text color.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2031,29 +2031,29 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to
choose a new link color.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the
color picker to choose a new color for alternate table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for subheading/subtotal
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
- the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens
+ the color picker to choose a new color for sub-subheading/total
table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color
picker to choose a new color for grand total rows.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -2064,17 +2064,17 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for
Titles.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Account Links.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2084,17 +2084,17 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Number Header table rows.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size
for Text Cells.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and
size for Total Number Cells.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2139,7 +2139,7 @@
<sect3 id="style-tech-images">
<title>Images</title>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Background Tile:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
@@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space
between table cell edges and cell contents</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2192,17 +2192,17 @@
<sect1 id="set-tax-options">
<title>Setting Tax Report Options</title>
- <para>The Income Tax Information dialog is used to set Tax Report Options.
+ <para>The Income Tax Information dialog is used to set Tax Report Options.
The settings on accounts in this dialog are used by the <acronym>TXF</acronym> Export function
- in reports to select the accounts for export. To access this dialog go to
+ in reports to select the accounts for export. To access this dialog go to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
- <para>If the Income Tax features are used, it is strongly recommended that
- the <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel> column be made visible on the accounts tab (click large
- downward-pointing arrow and select <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel> check box). The <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel>
- column will display the Form/Schedule and tax category (e.g., <guilabel>Schedule D
- Dividend, cap gain distrib.</guilabel>) assigned to an account, if any. Alternatively,
- it will display the following error messages which can be corrected through
+ <para>If the Income Tax features are used, it is strongly recommended that
+ the <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel> column be made visible on the accounts tab (click large
+ downward-pointing arrow and select <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel> check box). The <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel>
+ column will display the Form/Schedule and tax category (e.g., <guilabel>Schedule D
+ Dividend, cap gain distrib.</guilabel>) assigned to an account, if any. Alternatively,
+ it will display the following error messages which can be corrected through
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice></para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Not tax-related; tax type "tax_type": invalid code "code" for
+ <para>Not tax-related; tax type "tax_type": invalid code "code" for
account type</para>
</listitem>
@@ -2244,19 +2244,19 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Not tax-related; no description: form "form", code "code", tax
+ <para>Not tax-related; no description: form "form", code "code", tax
type "tax_type"</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Not tax-related; "form"("copy") "desc" (code "code", tax type
+ <para>Not tax-related; "form"("copy") "desc" (code "code", tax type
"tax_type")</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>The Income Tax Identity must be set in order to assign codes to
- individual accounts. Click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> to set the identity. The Tax Name is
- optional. If entered, it will be printed at the top of the report. A
+ <para>The Income Tax Identity must be set in order to assign codes to
+ individual accounts. Click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> to set the identity. The Tax Name is
+ optional. If entered, it will be printed at the top of the report. A
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> must be selected in order to activate the tax category
selections. The choices are:</para>
@@ -2282,81 +2282,81 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>While the Income Tax Entity Type can be changed after tax categories
- have been assigned to accounts, you should be cautioned that you will need
- to manually change each one if you do so, which could be quite tedious.
- The tax categories are unique for each Income Tax Entity Type, so changing
- the type will make all previously assigned categories invalid. It is assumed
+ <para>While the Income Tax Entity Type can be changed after tax categories
+ have been assigned to accounts, you should be cautioned that you will need
+ to manually change each one if you do so, which could be quite tedious.
+ The tax categories are unique for each Income Tax Entity Type, so changing
+ the type will make all previously assigned categories invalid. It is assumed
(and highly recommended) that each <application>&app;</application> file is for only one tax entity
- and this is where you specify its type of tax entity. You should not keep,
- for example, personal and partnership accounts mixed in one <application>&app;</application> file
+ and this is where you specify its type of tax entity. You should not keep,
+ for example, personal and partnership accounts mixed in one <application>&app;</application> file
if you plan to use the Income Tax Reporting features.</para>
- <para>A given <acronym>TXF</acronym> code can be assigned to multiple accounts. The Tax Schedule
- Report will combine accounts by code and generate a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for
- each account and a summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the total as calculated by the
+ <para>A given <acronym>TXF</acronym> code can be assigned to multiple accounts. The Tax Schedule
+ Report will combine accounts by code and generate a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for
+ each account and a summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the total as calculated by the
report.</para>
- <para>For codes for which the "Payer Name Source" is not grayed, the payer
- on the <acronym>TXF</acronym> record will be based on what is specified here, either the
- account name of the account or the account name of the account’s parent
- account. This feature is typically used for interest accounts or stocks or
+ <para>For codes for which the "Payer Name Source" is not grayed, the payer
+ on the <acronym>TXF</acronym> record will be based on what is specified here, either the
+ account name of the account or the account name of the account’s parent
+ account. This feature is typically used for interest accounts or stocks or
mutual funds that pay dividends where the individual payees are shown on
- the tax schedule. For example, if the parent account’s name is the name of
- your broker and the sub-account’s names are the names of individual stocks
- that pay dividends and the name on the 1099-DIV received is that of the
- broker, in order to match that name, you would select ’Parent Account’;
- the total dividends from the broker would be exported and, if you had
- several brokers, there would be an amount exported and a subtotal for each
- broker, along with each brokers name. Alternatively, if you had a parent
- account named <emphasis>Directly Held</emphasis>, for example, and below it sub-accounts for
- one or more stocks, you would receive a 1099-DIV from the issuer of each
- stock separately and, in order to match that name, you would select
- <guilabel>Current Account</guilabel>; the total dividends from each stock would be exported
- and, if you had several stocks, there would be an amount exported and a
+ the tax schedule. For example, if the parent account’s name is the name of
+ your broker and the sub-account’s names are the names of individual stocks
+ that pay dividends and the name on the 1099-DIV received is that of the
+ broker, in order to match that name, you would select ’Parent Account’;
+ the total dividends from the broker would be exported and, if you had
+ several brokers, there would be an amount exported and a subtotal for each
+ broker, along with each brokers name. Alternatively, if you had a parent
+ account named <emphasis>Directly Held</emphasis>, for example, and below it sub-accounts for
+ one or more stocks, you would receive a 1099-DIV from the issuer of each
+ stock separately and, in order to match that name, you would select
+ <guilabel>Current Account</guilabel>; the total dividends from each stock would be exported
+ and, if you had several stocks, there would be an amount exported and a
subtotal for each stock, along with each stock’s name as the payer.</para>
<para>Some tax Forms/Schedules need to have multiple copies filed under
- some circumstances (for example, Schedule C if a taxpayer and spouse have
- separate businesses). For tax categories on these Forms/Schedules, the
- <guilabel>Copy Number</guilabel> is not grayed out and can be used to segregate accounts by
+ some circumstances (for example, Schedule C if a taxpayer and spouse have
+ separate businesses). For tax categories on these Forms/Schedules, the
+ <guilabel>Copy Number</guilabel> is not grayed out and can be used to segregate accounts by
copy number.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para>Accounts: This pane contains the list of accounts. Select an
- account to set a <acronym>TXF</acronym> category. If no account is selected nothing is
- changed. If multiple accounts are selected, all of the accounts will
+ <para>Accounts: This pane contains the list of accounts. Select an
+ account to set a <acronym>TXF</acronym> category. If no account is selected nothing is
+ changed. If multiple accounts are selected, all of the accounts will
be set to the selected item. </para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Tax Related: Select this check-box to add tax information to an
- account then select the <acronym>TXF</acronym> Category below. This setting is displayed
+ <para>Tax Related: Select this check-box to add tax information to an
+ account then select the <acronym>TXF</acronym> Category below. This setting is displayed
on the account edit dialogue but cannot be changed from there.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>TXF Categories: Select the desired one. A detailed description
- appears just below (if available, otherwise it says <guilabel>No help
- available</guilabel>), along with the <acronym>TXF</acronym> code for the category and information
- about what line number on the form or schedule the amounts are
+ <para>TXF Categories: Select the desired one. A detailed description
+ appears just below (if available, otherwise it says <guilabel>No help
+ available</guilabel>), along with the <acronym>TXF</acronym> code for the category and information
+ about what line number on the form or schedule the amounts are
included in by tax year (used for detailed sort on report).</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Payer Name Source: Select an option to determine where the text
- description that is exported along with the value of the account is
- derived from, as described above. This is usually the name of a bank,
- stock, or mutual fund that pays dividends or interest. Occasionally,
+ <para>Payer Name Source: Select an option to determine where the text
+ description that is exported along with the value of the account is
+ derived from, as described above. This is usually the name of a bank,
+ stock, or mutual fund that pays dividends or interest. Occasionally,
it is a description of a deduction.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Copy Number: A copy number that is exported along with the value
- of the account. This is used to segregate amounts between different
- copies of the same Form/Schedule that may need to be filed (e.g.,
- Schedule C(1), Schedule C(2), etc.). This is also used to sort the
+ of the account. This is used to segregate amounts between different
+ copies of the same Form/Schedule that may need to be filed (e.g.,
+ Schedule C(1), Schedule C(2), etc.). This is also used to sort the
report.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -2387,9 +2387,9 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>Does not accept the date field and does not import the individual
- payment amounts, only the total. The date and individual payment amounts,
- only matter if you have to compute the penalty. (this may be a TurboTax
+ <para>Does not accept the date field and does not import the individual
+ payment amounts, only the total. The date and individual payment amounts,
+ only matter if you have to compute the penalty. (this may be a TurboTax
enhancement) </para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -2416,11 +2416,11 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>Does not accept the dates outside of the tax year. This is a problem
- for the last payment that is due Jan 15. <application>&app;</application> changes the the date of
- the last payment to Dec 31 for the export unless the "Do not use special
- date processing" option is selected in the report options display tab.
- The user will have to adjust for this after import. The date only
+ <para>Does not accept the dates outside of the tax year. This is a problem
+ for the last payment that is due Jan 15. <application>&app;</application> changes the the date of
+ the last payment to Dec 31 for the export unless the "Do not use special
+ date processing" option is selected in the report options display tab.
+ The user will have to adjust for this after import. The date only
matters if you have to compute the penalty. </para>
<para>TXF Tax eXport Format </para>
@@ -2431,16 +2431,16 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>Codes can be assigned to multiple accounts and the amounts will be
- summed for all the accounts generating one detail <acronym>TXF</acronym> record per account
- and one summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the sum. Codes that let you select "Payer
- Name Source" will generate a separate summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> account with each
- change in payer. Selecting the "Print <acronym>TXF</acronym> export parameters" option will
- cause the report to show to which codes this applies (Payer Name Source
+ <para>Codes can be assigned to multiple accounts and the amounts will be
+ summed for all the accounts generating one detail <acronym>TXF</acronym> record per account
+ and one summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the sum. Codes that let you select "Payer
+ Name Source" will generate a separate summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> account with each
+ change in payer. Selecting the "Print <acronym>TXF</acronym> export parameters" option will
+ cause the report to show to which codes this applies (Payer Name Source
option Y) and, for the accounts assigned to those codes, the Name Source
- each account is set to and the <acronym>TXF</acronym> item number that will be assigned to
- each. A summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record will be generated for each change in assigned
- item line number. These may not be handled the same by TaxCut and
+ each account is set to and the <acronym>TXF</acronym> item number that will be assigned to
+ each. A summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record will be generated for each change in assigned
+ item line number. These may not be handled the same by TaxCut and
TurboTax.</para>
@@ -2450,25 +2450,25 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>Short term or long term gain or loss from the sale of a security;
- generates <acronym>TXF</acronym> output for only the date sold and sales amount, with the
- date acquired and cost basis information left blank (to be separately
+ <para>Short term or long term gain or loss from the sale of a security;
+ generates <acronym>TXF</acronym> output for only the date sold and sales amount, with the
+ date acquired and cost basis information left blank (to be separately
added in the tax software). The code can be assigned to either a short-,
- long-, or mixed-term gain/loss income account and the security sales
- transaction should be entered as illustrated in Section 8.7, Selling
- Shares, of the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. The report uses the
- transaction split of the gain/loss account to find one or more other
- splits in the same transaction with negative share quantities. For each
- of these found, it generates a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> output record with the
- quantity sold, the name of the security, the date sold, and the sales
- amount. Note that if, for a given transaction, more than one transaction
- split is to a gain/loss income account assigned to code 673, <acronym>TXF</acronym> output
- data will be erroneously repeated. That is because the report will
- fetch the same data, and re-output it, for each transaction split set
- to a gain/loss income account within the same transaction. For this
+ long-, or mixed-term gain/loss income account and the security sales
+ transaction should be entered as illustrated in Section 8.7, Selling
+ Shares, of the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. The report uses the
+ transaction split of the gain/loss account to find one or more other
+ splits in the same transaction with negative share quantities. For each
+ of these found, it generates a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> output record with the
+ quantity sold, the name of the security, the date sold, and the sales
+ amount. Note that if, for a given transaction, more than one transaction
+ split is to a gain/loss income account assigned to code 673, <acronym>TXF</acronym> output
+ data will be erroneously repeated. That is because the report will
+ fetch the same data, and re-output it, for each transaction split set
+ to a gain/loss income account within the same transaction. For this
reason, there should be no more than one gain/loss account entered per
- transaction to use this tax reporting code properly. (Note that
- no amounts are used from <application>&app;</application>’s lot-tracking; a future enhancement
+ transaction to use this tax reporting code properly. (Note that
+ no amounts are used from <application>&app;</application>’s lot-tracking; a future enhancement
is expected to use this data to provide capital gain reporting).</para>
</sect2>
@@ -2493,14 +2493,14 @@
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="chang-lang">
<title>Changing the Language</title>
-
+
<para>The language of the <application>&app;</application> user interface is not modifiable
directly from the program’s preferences.</para>
-
- <para>The way you can change the language depends on the operating system you are running
+
+ <para>The way you can change the language depends on the operating system you are running
<application>&app;</application> on.</para>
<variablelist>
@@ -2509,10 +2509,10 @@
<para>In general you should set the <envar>LANGUAGE</envar> and <envar>LANG</envar> environment variables before starting <application>&app;</application>.
To do this you need to open a terminal and run the following command:</para>
<para><command>LANGUAGE=<replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> LANG=<replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> gnucash</command></para>
- <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run <application>&app;</application> with (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis>
+ <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run <application>&app;</application> with (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis>
for Deutsch, <emphasis>it_IT</emphasis> for Italian etc.)</para>
<note>
- <para>On some systems (e.g. Ubuntu) the encoding could be part of the locales name, like <replaceable>ll_LL.UTF-8</replaceable>.
+ <para>On some systems (e.g. Ubuntu) the encoding could be part of the locales name, like <replaceable>ll_LL.UTF-8</replaceable>.
You can use these names as well.</para>
</note>
</listitem>
@@ -2527,11 +2527,11 @@
<para><command>defaults delete $(mdls -name kMDItemCFBundleIdentifier -raw /Applications/GnuCash.app)</command></para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry><term><trademark>Windows</trademark></term>
<listitem>
- <para>If you are running <application>&app;</application> 2.4.0 (or newer) on Windows, you can set the interface language
- by editing the file <filename>environment</filename> with a text editor (e.g. <application>Notepad</application>). By default this file is installed in
+ <para>If you are running <application>&app;</application> 2.4.0 (or newer) on Windows, you can set the interface language
+ by editing the file <filename>environment</filename> with a text editor (e.g. <application>Notepad</application>). By default this file is installed in
<filename role="directory">c:\Program Files\gnucash\etc\gnucash</filename>. Change this file such that the last few lines are:</para>
<para>
<programlisting linenumbering="unnumbered"># If you wish GnuCash to use a different language, uncomment the two parameters
@@ -2539,17 +2539,17 @@
LANG=ll_LL
LANGUAGE={LANG}</programlisting>
</para>
- <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run <application>&app;</application> with (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis>
+ <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run <application>&app;</application> with (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis>
for Deutsch, <emphasis>it_IT</emphasis> for Italian etc.)</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
-
+
<tip>
<para>More and updated information about this topic can be found on the
<ulink type="http" url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Locale_Settings">Locale Settings page</ulink> of the <application>&app;</application> wiki.</para>
</tip>
-
+
</sect1>
</chapter>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
index 313b4a8..381ff0e 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@
<title>Account Tree - Menus</title>
<para>The <firstterm>Menubar</firstterm> for the Accounts Tree window contains the following
- options.</para>
+ options.</para>
<sect3 id="AccTree-file-menu">
<title>Account Tree - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu</title>
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
<para><guimenuitem>Import Transactions from CSV...</guimenuitem></para></entry>
<entry namest="c3">
- <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
a delimited file.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -570,7 +570,7 @@
<para>Starts the Renumber Account assistant. See
<xref linkend="chart-renumber"></xref>.</para>
<note>
- <para>This item is selectable only if you have highlighted an account with
+ <para>This item is selectable only if you have highlighted an account with
at least one subaccount in the accounts tree.</para>
</note></entry>
</row>
@@ -579,7 +579,7 @@
<entry><para><guimenuitem>Open Account</guimenuitem></para></entry>
<entry>
- <para>Opens the register window for the currently selected
+ <para>Opens the register window for the currently selected
account.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -587,7 +587,7 @@
<entry><para><guimenuitem>Open Subaccount</guimenuitem></para></entry>
<entry>
- <para>Opens a register window that displays all the transactions for the selected account
+ <para>Opens a register window that displays all the transactions for the selected account
and for all its subbaccounts.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -965,7 +965,7 @@
<tip>
<para>Warnings may be selectively enabled.</para>
</tip>
- </para>
+ </para>
</entry>
</row>
@@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@
<entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
<para>Select employee related activities.</para></entry>
</row>
-
+
<row>
<entry namest="c2">
<para><guimenuitem>Employees Overview</guimenuitem></para></entry>
@@ -1218,7 +1218,7 @@
<entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
<para>View and edit the list of Bills Due Reminder.</para></entry>
</row>
-
+
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
@@ -2050,7 +2050,7 @@
<note>
<para>The methods to enter transactions are described in detail in <xref linkend="ch_Common_Trans_Ops"/>.</para>
</note>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="Trans-menus">
@@ -2152,7 +2152,7 @@
<entry namest="c2">
<para><guimenuitem>Import Transactions from CSV...</guimenuitem></para></entry>
<entry namest="c3">
- <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
a delimited file.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -2564,7 +2564,7 @@
<entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
<para>Set the sort order of the transactions display. Requires a click to
- start options form. Option form requires
+ start options form. Option form requires
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>/<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to close.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -2751,7 +2751,7 @@
</row>
<row>
<entry><para><guimenuitem>Open Associated File/Location</guimenuitem></para></entry>
- <entry><para>Open the file or location associated with the transaction. Available if a
+ <entry><para>Open the file or location associated with the transaction. Available if a
file or location was associated to the currently selected transaction.</para></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
@@ -3400,7 +3400,7 @@
<para><guimenuitem>Import Transactions from CSV...</guimenuitem></para></entry>
<entry namest="c3">
- <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be
a delimited file.</para></entry>
</row>
@@ -3917,7 +3917,7 @@
<para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> menu are the same listed in <xref linkend="AccTree-ReportsMenu" />
with the addition of:
</para>
-
+
<table frame="topbot" id="Report-ReportsMenu">
<title>Report - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu.</title>
@@ -3949,7 +3949,7 @@
</guimenu><guimenuitem>Saved Report Configurations
</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item.</para></entry>
</row>
-
+
<row>
<entry namest="c1">
<para><guimenuitem>Save Report Configuration As...</guimenuitem></para></entry>
@@ -3957,7 +3957,7 @@
<entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
<para>Save the current report configuration with a new name.</para></entry>
</row>
-
+
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml
index bc8952c..e8e8d42 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
(translators put your name and email here)
-->
-<chapter id="Getting-Help">
+<chapter id="Getting-Help">
<title id="Using-Help">Using This Document & Getting Help</title>
<para>This document is organized in two dimensions;</para>
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<sect1 id="Help-Window">
<title>Accessing Help</title>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
side.</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="tutorial">
<title><application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide</title>
@@ -130,10 +130,10 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist></para>
- <para>Or you can chat live with the developers on IRC.
+ <para>Or you can chat live with the developers on IRC.
Join them on #gnucash at irc.gnome.org.</para>
- <para>The <ulink url="http://www.gnucash.org"><application>&app;</application> web site </ulink>
+ <para>The <ulink url="http://www.gnucash.org"><application>&app;</application> web site </ulink>
has more details on these channels. You will also find pointers there
to additional useful resources such as the <application>&app;</application> wiki
and bug tracking system.</para>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
index d5ec928..a387c1b 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
@@ -662,7 +662,7 @@
<para>The <guibutton>Show tips at startup</guibutton>
check-box is used to enable or disable the <guilabel>Tip of the
Day</guilabel> from running at <application>&app;</application> start-up.</para>
-
+
<para>It is also possible to configure the <guilabel>Tip of the
Day</guilabel> to run at start-up under the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab
in <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index aedf28c..581e537 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
<sect1 id="report-intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
-
+
<para>Reports and Charts give <application>&app;</application> the ability to present an overview of financial
data in various ways. This can range from a simple summary of account totals to an
advanced portfolio view. This section will present an explanation of the main <application>&app;</application>
@@ -38,28 +38,28 @@
Saved Report Configuration</guibutton> to select a report you have
previously configured and saved.
</para>
-
+
<para>Once the report has opened, click on the <guibutton>Options
</guibutton> toolbar button to
configure the report as needed, for example to set the report date or
select accounts.
</para>
-
- <tip><para>If you intend to save a report configuration, you
+
+ <tip><para>If you intend to save a report configuration, you
should choose a named report date option such as <emphasis>Today
- </emphasis>rather than enter a specific date so it is not necessary to
+ </emphasis>rather than enter a specific date so it is not necessary to
enter a specific date again in future reports.</para>
</tip>
-
+
<tip><para>If you often run a report with a date as at the start or end of an
accounting period, set the accounting period start and end dates in
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Accounting Period</guimenuitem></menuchoice> then select
appropriate report date options.
- See <xref linkend="prefs-accounting-period" />.
+ See <xref linkend="prefs-accounting-period" />.
</para>
</tip>
-
+
<tip>
<para>If you cannot find a specific report to suit your requirements, you
may be able to use the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> assistant
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@
by copying and pasting the report into a spreadsheet.
</para>
</tip>
-
+
<para>After you have configured a report, you can save the configuration for
future use by clicking either the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration
</guibutton> or <guibutton>Save Report Configuration As...</guibutton>
@@ -79,29 +79,29 @@
<sect2 id="report-saving">
<title>Saving a Report Configuration</title>
-
+
<para>To save a report configuration for future use, while the required
report tab is selected, go to the report options, select the
<emphasis>General</emphasis> tab and change the <emphasis>Report Name
</emphasis> to a meaningful unique name. Do not confuse this with the
<emphasis>Report Title</emphasis> which prints at the top of a report.
</para>
-
+
<para>Click the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton> or
<guibutton>Save Report Configuration As...</guibutton> button. This will
store your customized report options in a file in your home directory.
E.g. Linux: <emphasis>~/.gnucash/saved-reports-[versioninfo]</emphasis>
</para>
-
+
<para>The first time you save a report with a name that has not already
been saved, you can use either the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration
</guibutton> or the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration As...
</guibutton> button. You can modify the report name before saving it.
</para>
-
+
<para>After a report configuration for a specific name has been saved, the
<guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton> button will immediately
- update the saved report configuration without giving the opportunity to
+ update the saved report configuration without giving the opportunity to
save the configuration with a new name. Use the <guibutton>Save Report
Configuration As...</guibutton> button to save the current report
configuration with a new name.
@@ -114,41 +114,41 @@
& Custom</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Custom Multicolumn Report
</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="report-working">
<title>Working with Saved Report Configurations</title>
-
+
<para>Selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guimenuitem>Saved
- Report Configurations</guimenuitem></menuchoice> will open a dialog
+ Report Configurations</guimenuitem></menuchoice> will open a dialog
window with a list of the <emphasis>Saved Report Configurations
</emphasis> you have previously created. In this
context <emphasis>Saved Report Configurations</emphasis> means the set of
customized settings for standard reports.
</para>
-
+
<para>The <emphasis>Saved Report Configurations</emphasis> window lists
each of your previously saved report configurations, and 3 small buttons
at the end of each. These buttons perform the following actions
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Load (and run) report configuration. Double clicking a
report configuration also performs this action.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para>Edit report configuration name. This enables a report
configuration to be renamed.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem><para>Delete report configuration.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="report-config">
@@ -164,17 +164,17 @@
<sect2 id="report-opt-btns">
<title>Report Options Buttons</title>
- <para>After modifying report options, either</para>
-
+ <para>After modifying report options, either</para>
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to apply the changes,
regenerate the report and
close the options window.</para>
-
+
<para>or</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>Click the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button to apply the
changes, regenerate the report and leave the options window open for
@@ -182,18 +182,18 @@
</guibutton> and <guibutton>OK</guibutton> buttons will be disabled,
indicating changes have been applied, until further changes are made.
</para>
-
+
<para>or</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>Click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to close the
options window without applying any unapplied changes.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="report-common">
<title>Common Report Options</title>
@@ -211,15 +211,15 @@
(using the date selector), or by selecting a relative date from the menu.
Relative dates allow you to specify dates like <guilabel>Beginning of this year</guilabel> or
<guilabel>Today</guilabel>.</para>
-
- <tip><para>If you often run a report with a date as at the start or end
+
+ <tip><para>If you often run a report with a date as at the start or end
of an accounting period, set the accounting period start and end
dates in <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>
Preferences</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Accounting Period
</guimenuitem></menuchoice> then select appropriate report date
options. See <xref linkend="prefs-accounting-period" />.</para>
</tip>
-
+
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@
<listitem>
<para>Report Currency: Select the report currency. Generally, values will be
converted to this currency for display.</para>
-
+
<para>The default Report Currency is defined in <menuchoice>
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice> Reports tab. See <xref linkend="prefs-reports" />.
@@ -305,10 +305,10 @@
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="report-classes">
<title>Reports Listed By Class</title>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> has classified the main types of
reports into major classes. These
are all available under the Reports menu.</para>
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@
</sect4>
</sect3>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="report-assets">
@@ -873,15 +873,15 @@
<application>&app;</application> file over time. By default, the report shows all accounts
in <emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis>, <emphasis>Current Assets</emphasis>,
<emphasis>Fixed Assets</emphasis>, <emphasis>Investments</emphasis> and Special Accounts
- (if they exist) and it displays monthly bars for the current financial period.
+ (if they exist) and it displays monthly bars for the current financial period.
This report provides a graphic view of the assets in the file over time.</para>
<tip>
- <para>Like all the generic reports, the user can assign a title and save the report with
+ <para>Like all the generic reports, the user can assign a title and save the report with
it's selected options for re-use later.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The display is in the form of either a stacked barchart or simple barchart with an
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The display is in the form of either a stacked barchart or simple barchart with an
option to display a table of the values.</para>
<para>This report calculates and displays a default of 8 bars or up to 24 separate asset
@@ -890,40 +890,40 @@
selected accounts summed as <emphasis>Other</emphasis>.</para>
<para>The report exploits the outline structure of the chart of accounts to allow the user
- to select top level accounts and sub-accounts down to a user-selectable depth. Selected
+ to select top level accounts and sub-accounts down to a user-selectable depth. Selected
sub-accounts below the selected depth are automatically <emphasis>summed up</emphasis> into
the next level when it is also selected. The default number of sub-account levels is 2,
giving a summary view. Increasing the number of sub-levels increases the detail available
- to display. It is possible to un-select a higher level account and leave sub-accounts
+ to display. It is possible to un-select a higher level account and leave sub-accounts
selected to force greater detail to appear in the report.</para>
<para>By default the report includes all <emphasis>asset</emphasis> accounts and sub-accounts,
as well as <emphasis>Imbalance</emphasis> and <emphasis>Orphan</emphasis> Special accounts
- in whatever currencies or commodities may be present. The report's base currency is the
+ in whatever currencies or commodities may be present. The report's base currency is the
default currency of the <application>&app;</application> file but if the file has data
for multiple currencies, then it can be changed to another currency.</para>
- <para>Since each account may be individually selected, the report can be designed to focus
+ <para>Since each account may be individually selected, the report can be designed to focus
on a small subset of data such as current assets or investments.</para>
- <para>The overall interval of the report defaults to start at the start of the current
- accounting period and to end at the end of the current accounting period. Numerous
+ <para>The overall interval of the report defaults to start at the start of the current
+ accounting period and to end at the end of the current accounting period. Numerous
other starting choices and ending choices are available.</para>
<para>The first bar shows the selected values at the end of the day on the first date chosen.
- There are a number of choices for step size from <emphasis>day</emphasis> to
- <emphasis>year</emphasis> with the default being <emphasis>month</emphasis>. Note that if any
+ There are a number of choices for step size from <emphasis>day</emphasis> to
+ <emphasis>year</emphasis> with the default being <emphasis>month</emphasis>. Note that if any
step date would fall on the 29th, 30th or 31st in a month that does not have such a date
the next interval will be 31 days later. For that step only the date will <emphasis>slip</emphasis>
up to 3 days into the following month. This is true for releases at least through 2.4.13.
Bug 639049 is open in Bugzilla to modify this behavior.</para>
- <para>Currently, there is no option to start the report on the last day of any period.
- There is also no option to show <emphasis>beginning</emphasis> balances or <emphasis>end of
- previous step</emphasis> balances. This makes it difficult to correlate this report to
+ <para>Currently, there is no option to start the report on the last day of any period.
+ There is also no option to show <emphasis>beginning</emphasis> balances or <emphasis>end of
+ previous step</emphasis> balances. This makes it difficult to correlate this report to
business quarterly reports, for example.</para>
- <para>The Net Worth linechart report, Liability barchart report and Net Worth barchart
+ <para>The Net Worth linechart report, Liability barchart report and Net Worth barchart
report are similar except for the graphic type and default account groups selected.</para>
<para>Other features are customizable in a manner similar to other standard reports.</para>
@@ -1485,7 +1485,7 @@
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="report-sample">
<title>Sample & Custom</title>
@@ -1510,32 +1510,32 @@
<sect2 id="report-budget">
<title>Budget</title>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Balance Sheet</title>
<para> </para>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Barchart</title>
<para> </para>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Flow</title>
<para> </para>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Income Statement</title>
<para> </para>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Profit & Loss</title>
<para> </para>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>Budget Report</title>
<para>This report is used to compare budgeted and real amounts for selected accounts. It allows you to review how well you follow the budget.</para>
@@ -1576,9 +1576,9 @@
</sect3>
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="report-print">
<title>Printing or Exporting Reports and Charts</title>
@@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@
Print <application>&app;</application> Document dialog is accessed from the <guibutton>Print</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or
go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem></menuchoice> in the menu. To Export a report to a web page (<acronym>HTML</acronym>) select
the <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> and type in a file name.</para>
-
+
<para>Most reports, being presented in HTML, can also be copied and pasted into a spreadsheet.</para>
<para>The Print <application>&app;</application> Document dialog is used to select which Printer to send the
@@ -1610,7 +1610,7 @@
<para>It is possible to write reports if the current ones are not suitable. To do this
you will need to know Scheme (a LISP-like programming language), and it is an
excellent idea to have a copy of the <application>&app;</application> source code available. </para>
-
+
<para>The reporting interface is documented in the source code file
<filename>src/report/report-system/doc/report-html.txt</filename>.
The file <filename>src/report/utility-reports/hello-world.scm</filename>
@@ -1622,14 +1622,14 @@
<para>It is also necessary to access data from the engine to get
information for your report. This is
- <emphasis>since version 2.1.x</emphasis> performed by a set of
+ <emphasis>since version 2.1.x</emphasis> performed by a set of
Scheme wrapper functions that are documented in the file
<filename>src/engine/swig-engine.c</filename>.
<emphasis>Up to version 2.0.5</emphasis> it was
<filename>src/g-wrap/gnc.html</filename>. Examine some of the other
reports in src/scm/report for an indication of how they are used.</para>
-
- <para>Some users started a table in the <application>&app;</application> wiki
+
+ <para>Some users started a table in the <application>&app;</application> wiki
<ulink url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Custom_Reports#The_GnuCash_API">
Custom Reports#The GnuCash API</ulink>.
</para>
@@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@
./configure --enable-doxygen --enable-html-docs
make doc
</screen> on your sources or online
- <ulink url="http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MAINT/">http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MAINT/</ulink> or
+ <ulink url="http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MAINT/">http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MAINT/</ulink> or
<ulink url="http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MASTER/">http://code.gnucash.org/docs/MASTER/</ulink>
to get more information about the functions.
</para>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
index 657f7a5..e056ee4 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
@@ -24,13 +24,13 @@
software was not configured to support Online banking, or the tools appropriate for the current window.</para>
<sect1 id="tool-find"><title>Find</title>
- <para>The <application>&app;</application> <emphasis>Find</emphasis> assistant can be used to <link linkend="tool-find-txn">find
+ <para>The <application>&app;</application> <emphasis>Find</emphasis> assistant can be used to <link linkend="tool-find-txn">find
transactions</link> or to perform <link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">business related</link> research on your data file.</para>
<sect2 id="tool-find-txn">
<title>Find Transaction</title>
<para><guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> is used to search for transactions in <application>&app;</application>
- and display the results in a register window. To open the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog in
+ and display the results in a register window. To open the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog in
<guilabel>Split Search</guilabel> mode, you can type the keyboard shortcut <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>f</keycap></keycombo>.</para>
<para>Exactly which transactions are searched depends on
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
<para>The first row of the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog
indicates that you are performing a <guilabel>Split Search</guilabel>.</para>
</note>
-
+
<para>There are two panes in the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog. The top pane contains
the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> buttons and the bottom pane contains the <guilabel>Type of
Search</guilabel> selection.</para>
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@
to have at least one match. The <guilabel>any criteria are met</guilabel> search requires
only one of the criteria rows to be matched.</para>
- <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
+ <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
criteria buttons (see table <xref linkend="tool-find-bttns" /> for a comprehensive list of combinations)</para>
<para>In the <guilabel>Type of Search</guilabel> pane there are five selections. The first option is always enabled, the following
- three are available when you invoke the <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> option from a register window or after performing the
- first <guibutton>Find</guibutton> if the <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> command was invoked from any other window.
+ three are available when you invoke the <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> option from a register window or after performing the
+ first <guibutton>Find</guibutton> if the <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> command was invoked from any other window.
Last option is available only for <link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">Business search</link>.</para>
<variablelist>
@@ -77,33 +77,33 @@
<para>Perform a new transaction search</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Refine current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Search within the results of the previous search</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Add results to current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Search based on the first set of criteria or the new criteria</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Delete results from current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Discard any results that match the previous search results</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Search only if data are marked as active. This selector
- is greyed out for the <guilabel>Split Search</guilabel> as it is meaningful only for
+ is greyed out for the <guilabel>Split Search</guilabel> as it is meaningful only for
<link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">business related search</link></para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -494,11 +494,11 @@
</row>
<row>
- <entry morerows="1" valign="middle"><para>Reconcile<footnote><para>The
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle"><para>Reconcile<footnote><para>The
<guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> option applies the selected criteria to each line
of a transaction individually. Each transaction line may have only one of the indicated values,
- but there is often a mix of values within a complete transaction, so companion lines may
- not meet the selected criteria. See separate note defining status values. For a detailed
+ but there is often a mix of values within a complete transaction, so companion lines may
+ not meet the selected criteria. See separate note defining status values. For a detailed
description of transaction statuses see <xref linkend="trans-stts" />
</para></footnote></para></entry>
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@
</row>
<row>
- <entry morerows="1" valign="middle"><para>Account<footnote><para>The
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle"><para>Account<footnote><para>The
<guilabel>Account</guilabel> option performs a search where the accounts selected
in the <guilabel>Choose Accounts</guilabel> dialog will both be searched individually for
results. This means that a match in any of the selected accounts will
@@ -577,7 +577,7 @@
</row>
<row>
- <entry><para>All Accounts<footnote><para>The <guilabel>All Accounts</guilabel>
+ <entry><para>All Accounts<footnote><para>The <guilabel>All Accounts</guilabel>
option performs a search where accounts selected in the <guilabel>Choose Accounts</guilabel>
dialog will only return results that match in both accounts.</para></footnote></para></entry>
@@ -637,11 +637,11 @@
<sect2 id="tool-find-bsnss">
<title>Find Customer, Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher</title>
<para>The business find assistant is used to search for business related items (Customer,
- Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher). To open the business search dialog
- select the desired item to <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> from the
+ Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher). To open the business search dialog
+ select the desired item to <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> from the
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer/Vendor/Employee </guisubmenu></menuchoice> submenus.</para>
- <tip>
+ <tip>
<para>The titlebar and the first row of the assistant dialog reports the item type you are searching for: <guilabel>Customer,
Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher</guilabel>.</para>
</tip>
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@
to have at least one match. The <guilabel>any criteria are met</guilabel> search requires
only one of the criteria rows to be matched.</para>
- <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
+ <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
criteria buttons (see tables <xref linkend="tool-find-cstmr" />,
<xref linkend="tool-find-nvc" />, <xref linkend="tool-find-jb" />, <xref linkend="tool-find-vndr" />,
<xref linkend="tool-find-bll" />, <xref linkend="tool-find-mply" /> <xref linkend="tool-find-vx" />
@@ -687,28 +687,28 @@
<para>Perform a new search</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Refine current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Search within the results of the previous search</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Add results to current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Search based on the first set of criteria or the new criteria</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Delete results from current search</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Discard any results that match the previous search results</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
@@ -721,15 +721,15 @@
<sect3>
<title>The rest of the search dialog</title>
<para>When search criteria are selected, you can press the <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. You will be
- presented with the list of search results in the same <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog.</para>
+ presented with the list of search results in the same <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog.</para>
<tip>
- <para>Aside the results, <application>&app;</application> gives you some buttons to manage
+ <para>Aside the results, <application>&app;</application> gives you some buttons to manage
the highlighted result.</para>
</tip>
<tip>
- <para>In the bottom right of the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog there is a button that allows to create a
+ <para>In the bottom right of the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog there is a button that allows to create a
<guibutton>New</guibutton> business item.</para>
</tip>
@@ -737,7 +737,7 @@
<para>Press the <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button to close the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> assistant dialog.</para>
</note>
</sect3>
-
+
<sect3>
<title>List of search criteria buttons</title>
<table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-cstmr">
@@ -2211,12 +2211,12 @@
<sect1 id="trans-sched-slr">
<title>Since Last Run Assistant</title>
- <para>The <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant is run automatically when
+ <para>The <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant is run automatically when
<application>&app;</application> is started. It is
used to enter into the register any transactions that are due to be automatically
- entered (see <xref linkend="trans-sched"></xref>). The run on <application>&app;</application> start can be
+ entered (see <xref linkend="trans-sched"></xref>). The run on <application>&app;</application> start can be
altered in the <link linkend="prefs-sched">Scheduled Transactions</link> tab of the <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.
- To run the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant manually, go to
+ To run the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant manually, go to
<menuchoice><guilabel>Actions</guilabel><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Since Last Run...</guimenuitem></menuchoice></para>
@@ -2225,19 +2225,19 @@
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Transaction</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>The name assigned in the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel> that identifies
+ <para>The name assigned in the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel> that identifies
the scheduled transaction.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>State</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <guilabel>state</guilabel> column of the scheduled transaction can be one of the
following:</para>
<tip>
- <para>Click on the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field in the row of a transaction to
- change its state (this option is available only if the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field is not
+ <para>Click on the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field in the row of a transaction to
+ change its state (this option is available only if the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field is not
<emphasis>empty</emphasis>)</para>
</tip>
<variablelist termlength="8">
@@ -2246,7 +2246,7 @@
<listitem>
<para>If a scheduled transaction is being displayed, either to be created or as a reminder, the user can
set the status to <guilabel>Ignored</guilabel> to skip this event. The scheduled transaction will not be entered in
- the register and the next reminder for this scheduled transaction will be the next occurrence.
+ the register and the next reminder for this scheduled transaction will be the next occurrence.
For instance, if you have a scheduled transaction set up with a reminder to transfer $500 at the
end of the month to your <emphasis>savings</emphasis> account but you bought yourself a computer
this month and don’t have the money for this month’s transfer then you would
@@ -2269,15 +2269,15 @@
transaction after it's created.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>Reminder</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>You are <emphasis>n</emphasis> days from the scheduled transaction due date.
- The number of days <emphasis>n</emphasis> to remind in advance, is set either in
- the <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> <link linkend="prefs-sched">Scheduled Transactions</link>
- tab or in the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab of the
+ <para>You are <emphasis>n</emphasis> days from the scheduled transaction due date.
+ The number of days <emphasis>n</emphasis> to remind in advance, is set either in
+ the <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> <link linkend="prefs-sched">Scheduled Transactions</link>
+ tab or in the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab of the
<link linkend="sched-editor">Scheduled Transaction Editor</link>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>To-create</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>This scheduled transaction will be automatically created when
+ <para>This scheduled transaction will be automatically created when
you press <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -2293,15 +2293,15 @@
<varlistentry>
<term><emphasis>Empty</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
- <para>An empty field means that no operations are pending for the
+ <para>An empty field means that no operations are pending for the
scheduled transaction.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
+ </variablelist>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
-
+
<para>At the bottom of the window there are two buttons:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -2310,15 +2310,15 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button closes the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window and applies
+ <para>The <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button closes the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window and applies
the pending operations.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
- <para>At the bottom right of the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window there is also an
- option that allows to <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel>. If this option
- is enabled when there are one or more transactions <guilabel>To-create</guilabel>,
- pressing <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will open a register window in which are shown the
+
+ <para>At the bottom right of the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window there is also an
+ option that allows to <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel>. If this option
+ is enabled when there are one or more transactions <guilabel>To-create</guilabel>,
+ pressing <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will open a register window in which are shown the
details of the scheduled transactions splits entered automatically by <application>&app;</application>.</para>
</sect1>
@@ -2336,7 +2336,7 @@
<para>The Mortgage and Loan Repayment assistant opens with a screen that briefly
describes what this assistant does. The three buttons at the very bottom of the screen
will not change while using the assistant.</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the assistant and cancel creating the
@@ -2732,7 +2732,7 @@
<note><para>This section is "under construction - any input will be welcome !!".</para></note>
<para>The <acronym>HBCI</acronym> Assistant is used to create and edit data to enable access to Online banking transactions.
- Currently the best instruction for this process are in the <application>&app;</application> wiki at
+ Currently the best instruction for this process are in the <application>&app;</application> wiki at
<ulink url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Setting_up_OFXDirectConnect_in_&app;_2">Setting up OFXDirectConnect
in <application>&app;</application> 2</ulink>. If <guilabel>HBCI Setup</guilabel> does not appear in your <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu, verify that you
are in an Account Tree or Register tab.
@@ -2968,7 +2968,7 @@
button, and edit the <emphasis role="bold">Edit Security</emphasis> dialog box. To remove a commodity,
select the commodity and click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.</para>
- <para>The fields in the New/Edit Security screens are the same as defined for the Security Editor
+ <para>The fields in the New/Edit Security screens are the same as defined for the Security Editor
<xref linkend="tool-security-edit"></xref>. Below these fields are the options for Online Quotes.</para>
</sect2>
@@ -2977,7 +2977,7 @@
<title>Configuring Securities/Currencies for On-Line Retrieval of Prices</title>
<para>To support on-line quotations for a particular stock or mutual fund account, you must first enable
- on-line price quoting and select a price source in the Security Editor. Online currency quotes require
+ on-line price quoting and select a price source in the Security Editor. Online currency quotes require
only that the check-box for Online quotes and the timezone be selected, and that the <quote>Get Quotes</quote>
box be checked in the Security Editor.</para>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Transactions.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Transactions.xml
index e0fc856..aabe630 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Transactions.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Transactions.xml
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Translators:
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Importing transactions either from a <acronym>QIF</acronym>/<acronym>OFX</acronym> file or via
+ <para>Importing transactions either from a <acronym>QIF</acronym>/<acronym>OFX</acronym> file or via
"<acronym>OFX</acronym> on-line banking".</para>
</listitem>
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Translators:
<para>The default view or style can be changed by going to <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu, three radio buttons
will select the desired option. When the window closes the style will revert to the Basic Ledger style. To
- make this change permanent change the style in the <guilabel>Register Defaults</guilabel> tab of the
+ make this change permanent change the style in the <guilabel>Register Defaults</guilabel> tab of the
<guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Translators:
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- <para>The two other options to change the view of the register are; to restrict displayed items with the
+ <para>The two other options to change the view of the register are; to restrict displayed items with the
<menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Filter By ...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>,
and changing the sort order <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sort Order</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
<xref linkend="Trans-view-menu"></xref>.
@@ -227,15 +227,15 @@ Translators:
in the <guilabel>date</guilabel> field by default when the register window is opened.</para>
<note>
- <para>When working on transactions in <application>&app;</application>, be aware that the
+ <para>When working on transactions in <application>&app;</application>, be aware that the
<keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key and the <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key behave
differently, and perform different actions.</para>
<para>The <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key moves to the first field of the next split,
regardless of which field you are in. If there is no next split, proceeds to the next transaction.
- In any case, <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> finishes the transaction edit, and any
+ In any case, <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> finishes the transaction edit, and any
imbalance is posted to <emphasis>Imbalance-CUR</emphasis>, where <emphasis>CUR</emphasis> is the
currency of the transaction.</para>
- <para>The <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key moves to the next field in the current split.
+ <para>The <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key moves to the next field in the current split.
If it's the last field, moves to the next split, creating a new one if there isn't one. If the
split is blank, the <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key finishes the transaction and posts any
imbalance to <emphasis>Imbalance-CUR</emphasis>, as above.</para>
@@ -299,16 +299,16 @@ Translators:
<listitem>
<para>Press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key to move to the first of the amount fields. The names of the next two columns are different
according to what type of account is opened. For example, <emphasis>Bank</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Deposit</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>Withdrawal</guilabel> here, <emphasis>Credit Card</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Payment</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>Charge</guilabel>, and <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Shares</guilabel>, <guilabel>Price</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Withdrawal</guilabel> here, <emphasis>Credit Card</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Payment</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Charge</guilabel>, and <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Shares</guilabel>, <guilabel>Price</guilabel>,
<guilabel>Buy</guilabel> and <guilabel>Sell</guilabel>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Enter an amount for the transaction in the correct fields. When the transaction is "balanced"
pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice> will
- finish the transaction. Selecting the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> icon or going to
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice> will
+ finish the transaction. Selecting the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> icon or going to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cancel Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
will erase the transaction.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -320,8 +320,8 @@ Translators:
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>To move to the blank transaction at the bottom of the register, press the
- <guibutton>Blank</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon or go to
+ <para>To move to the blank transaction at the bottom of the register, press the
+ <guibutton>Blank</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon or go to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Blank Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
</listitem>
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Translators:
<listitem>
<para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to the first of the amount fields. The names of the next two columns
- are different according to what type of account is opened. For example, Bank accounts show
+ are different according to what type of account is opened. For example, Bank accounts show
Deposit and Withdrawal here, Credit Card accounts show Payment and Charge, and Stock accounts
show Shares, Price, Buy and Sell.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -397,9 +397,9 @@ Translators:
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>To enter the additional splits, press the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
- Transactions with more than one split show the text <emphasis>--Split Transaction--</emphasis> and the
+ <para>To enter the additional splits, press the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+ Transactions with more than one split show the text <emphasis>--Split Transaction--</emphasis> and the
<guibutton>Split</guibutton> button will need to be used
to show the details.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -417,20 +417,20 @@ Translators:
<para>When one of the short lines is selected, the column titles will change. The very first and last
(<guilabel>Date</guilabel> and <guilabel>Balance</guilabel>) columns will have blank titles. <guilabel>Num</guilabel>
will change to <guilabel>Action</guilabel>, <guilabel>Description</guilabel> to <guilabel>Memo</guilabel>,
- the now blank <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will change to <guilabel>Account</guilabel>. The last two amount columns
+ the now blank <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will change to <guilabel>Account</guilabel>. The last two amount columns
will show the name described in step seven.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>The <guilabel>Action</guilabel> and <guilabel>Memo</guilabel> columns are optional to fill out at this stage.
+ <para>The <guilabel>Action</guilabel> and <guilabel>Memo</guilabel> columns are optional to fill out at this stage.
<guilabel>Action</guilabel> is used to describe what kind of account transfer is involved. <guilabel>Memo</guilabel>
is an additional description of the transfer.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Move to the missing amount field on the third line and fill in the amount. Pressing the
- <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
will now move the cursor to the next line.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Translators:
<listitem>
<para>Pressing <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> as described above will jump to the next
transaction. Selecting the next transaction will close the split or it can be manually closed by pressing
- the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> icon or selecting
+ the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> icon or selecting
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
@@ -496,13 +496,13 @@ Translators:
<para>Editing a transaction involves just selecting the part of the transaction that needs to be changed.
Once the changes are complete pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the
- <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
+ <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice> will
now move the cursor to the next line or transaction.
</para>
<para>To see a more detailed view of a transaction for editing in Basic Ledger, press the
- <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
+ <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
</sect1>
@@ -510,16 +510,16 @@ Translators:
<title>Deleting a Transaction</title>
<para>If a transaction needs to be removed from the register, select the transaction and press either
- the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
+ the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
A window will appear to confirm the delete, unless the preference has been changed. The window presents
two options; "Remember and don’t ask again", and "Remember and don’t ask again this session". The response
- will be set according to the selected checkbox. The preference can also be reset via
+ will be set according to the selected checkbox. The preference can also be reset via
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. <xref linkend="reset-warning"></xref>.</para>
<para>Parts of a transaction can also be removed by pressing the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on
- the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or selecting
+ the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or selecting
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. The part of the
transaction that needs to be deleted can be then selected for deletion.</para>
</sect1>
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Translators:
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>If in Basic Ledger, press the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
to open the transaction. If in other modes select transaction.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Translators:
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>A dialog called <emphasis role="bold">Duplicate Transaction</emphasis> will prompt for a new
+ <para>A dialog called <emphasis role="bold">Duplicate Transaction</emphasis> will prompt for a new
Date and Num for the transaction.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Translators:
<sect1 id="trans-stts">
<title>Setting the reconcile status (<guilabel>R</guilabel> field) of a transaction</title>
- <para>In the <application>&app;</application> register there is a column named <guilabel>R</guilabel>. This field
+ <para>In the <application>&app;</application> register there is a column named <guilabel>R</guilabel>. This field
indicates the status of a transaction. Possible values are:</para>
<variablelist>
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Translators:
<varlistentry>
<term><guilabel>y</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>Status assigned solely by the reconciliation process (see <xref linkend="acct-reconcile" />).
+ <para>Status assigned solely by the reconciliation process (see <xref linkend="acct-reconcile" />).
Places limits optionally requiring confirmation on editing fields in that line of a transaction.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Translators:
<term><guilabel>v</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Voided. Status is assigned or released manually through the transaction menu (<xref linkend="Trans-transaction-menu" />)
- to a transaction and applies to every line in the transaction. It hides most of the transaction details but does not delete them.
+ to a transaction and applies to every line in the transaction. It hides most of the transaction details but does not delete them.
When a transaction is voided a reason entry is required that appears to the right of the description.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ Translators:
the <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item in the Account Register Window. </para>
<para>Select the transaction in the Account Register Window and either click the <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> icon or select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the Account Register Window
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open the Account Register Window
target. If the transaction is split
between more than one transfer account then you will need to show all the split transfer accounts first and
select the transfer account to jump to.</para>
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Translators:
<para>The easiest way to setup a scheduled transaction is to use an existing transaction in an account register
as a template. Select the transaction you wish to use as a template and then either select the
- <guibutton>Schedule</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
+ <guibutton>Schedule</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Schedule...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
This will bring up the <emphasis role="bold">Make Scheduled Transaction</emphasis> dialog.</para>
@@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ Translators:
characteristic from the display.</para>
<para>The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> of this window contains three buttons to create, delete and edit scheduled transactions.
- <guibutton>New</guibutton> and <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> buttons opens the Edit Scheduled Transaction dialog.
+ <guibutton>New</guibutton> and <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> buttons opens the Edit Scheduled Transaction dialog.
<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> removes the selected scheduled transaction.
The same options are available thru <menuchoice><guimenu>Schedule</guimenu><guimenuitem>New/Edit/Delete</guimenuitem></menuchoice>,
from the Scheduled Transaction Tab. </para>
@@ -786,12 +786,12 @@ Translators:
a custom check format. Check position and Date formats are also customizable.</para>
<para>To print a single check in <application>&app;</application>, select the transaction to print a check for
- and go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+ and go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
This will open the Print Checks properties dialog to print the selected transaction.</para>
<para>To print multiple checks in <application>&app;</application> execute a search to find the transactions
you wish to print. With the search results window as the front window go to
- <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will open
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will open
the Print Checks properties dialog to print all the transactions in the search results window.</para>
<para>The Print Checks dialog has two tabs. The first tab, Options, is used to setup
diff --git a/help/C/Help_chartofaccts.xml b/help/C/Help_chartofaccts.xml
index 3373947..b94407a 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_chartofaccts.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_chartofaccts.xml
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
-<para> Assets
+<para> Assets
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
-<para> Cash On Hand
+<para> Cash On Hand
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -22,12 +22,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Fixed Assets
+<para> Fixed Assets
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -50,12 +50,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Investments
+<para> Investments
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -78,20 +78,20 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Liabilities
+<para> Liabilities
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
-<para> Taxes
+<para> Taxes
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -119,12 +119,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Accounts Payable
+<para> Accounts Payable
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -147,12 +147,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Loans
+<para> Loans
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -170,16 +170,16 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Equity
+<para> Equity
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -197,16 +197,16 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Income
+<para> Income
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
-<para> Interest Income
+<para> Interest Income
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -224,12 +224,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Dividends
+<para> Dividends
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -242,12 +242,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Consulting
+<para> Consulting
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -260,12 +260,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Salary
+<para> Salary
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -273,12 +273,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Commissions
+<para> Commissions
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -286,20 +286,20 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Expenses
+<para> Expenses
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
-<para> Rent and Utilities
+<para> Rent and Utilities
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -337,12 +337,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Office Expenses
+<para> Office Expenses
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -380,12 +380,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Auto Expenses
+<para> Auto Expenses
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -408,12 +408,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Taxes
+<para> Taxes
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -431,12 +431,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Wages and Salaries
+<para> Wages and Salaries
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -454,12 +454,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Travel
+<para> Travel
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -482,12 +482,12 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
-<para> Marketing
+<para> Marketing
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -505,11 +505,11 @@
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_fdl-appendix.xml b/help/C/Help_fdl-appendix.xml
index fdd77f7..c48a459 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_fdl-appendix.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_fdl-appendix.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<!--
+<!--
The GNU Free Documentation License 1.1 in DocBook
Markup by Eric Baudais <baudais at okstate.edu>
Maintained by the GNOME Documentation Project
@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@
</copyright>
<legalnotice id="fdl-legalnotice">
<para>
- <address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>59 Temple Place,
- Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state>
- <postcode>02111-1307</postcode> <country>USA</country></address>
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
+ <address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>59 Temple Place,
+ Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state>
+ <postcode>02111-1307</postcode> <country>USA</country></address>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
</para>
</legalnotice>
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@
their work, while not being considered responsible for
modifications made by others.
</para>
-
+
<para>
This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means
that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in
the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License,
which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
</para>
-
+
<para>
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
@@ -68,14 +68,14 @@
work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed
as <quote>you</quote>.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-modified">
A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work
containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied
verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another
language.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-secondary">
A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a
front-matter section of the <link
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
License.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-cover-texts">
The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of
text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts,
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
License.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-transparent">
A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link
linkend="fdl-document"> Document</link> means a machine-readable
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called
<quote>Opaque</quote>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include
plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@
machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for
output purposes only.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-title-page">
The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the
title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
beginning of the body of the text.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section2">
<title>2. VERBATIM COPYING</title>
<para>
@@ -165,13 +165,13 @@
must also follow the conditions in <link
linkend="fdl-section3">section 3</link>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated
above, and you may publicly display copies.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section3">
<title>3. COPYING IN QUANTITY</title>
<para>
@@ -191,14 +191,14 @@
conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other
respects.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
adjacent pages.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If you publish or distribute <link
linkend="fdl-transparent">Opaque</link> copies of the <link
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@
or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the
public.
</para>
-
+
<para>
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors
of the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> well before
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@
to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section4">
<title>4. MODIFICATIONS</title>
<para>
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do
these things in the Modified Version:
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist mark="opencircle">
<listitem>
<formalpara>
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>B</title>
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>C</title>
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>D</title>
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>E</title>
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>F</title>
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>G</title>
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>H</title>
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>I</title>
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>J</title>
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>K</title>
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>L</title>
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>M</title>
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>N</title>
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@
</formalpara>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>
If the <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>
includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@
Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be
distinct from any other section titles.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>,
provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
definition of a standard.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link
linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@
replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
publisher that added the old one.
</para>
-
+
<para>
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> do not by this License
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@
linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version </link>.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section5">
<title>5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS</title>
<para>
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@
and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in
its license notice.
</para>
-
+
<para>
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License,
and multiple identical <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@
list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined
work.
</para>
-
+
<para>
In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
<quote>History</quote> in the various original documents,
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@
delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section6">
<title>6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS</title>
<para>
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
documents in all other respects.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@
copying of that document.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section7">
<title>7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS</title>
<para>
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@
aggregate.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section8">
<title>8. TRANSLATION</title>
<para>
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@
the original English version will prevail.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section9">
<title>9. TERMINATION</title>
<para>
@@ -589,7 +589,7 @@
parties remain in full compliance.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section10">
<title>10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE</title>
<para>
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@
type="http"
url="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@
the License in the document and put the following copyright and
license notices just after the title page:
</para>
-
+
<blockquote>
<para>
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME.
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@
License</quote>.
</para>
</blockquote>
-
+
<para>
If you have no <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote>
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@
<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link
linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Back-Cover Texts</link>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code,
we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your
@@ -662,6 +662,6 @@
License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software.
</para>
</sect1>
-</appendix>
+</appendix>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml b/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
index 1f3afa0..5b12f43 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
@@ -4,20 +4,20 @@
Last modified: August 08th 2016 (reflect updates by F::Q 1.38)
modified: April 11th 2013 (reflect bugfixes by F::Q 1.18)
modified: September 21th 2012
- modified: March 15th 2007
- modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: March 15th 2007
+ modified: August 12th 2006
modified: February 28th 2005
Maintainers:
- Frank H. Ellenberger <frank.h.ellenberger at gmail.com>
- Previous: Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
- Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+ Frank H. Ellenberger <frank.h.ellenberger at gmail.com>
+ Previous: Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
Author:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Translators:
- (translators put your name and email here)
+ (translators put your name and email here)
-->
<appendix id="tips">
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@
</entry>
<entry>
<para> In 2012 happened a modification on the website.
- Make shure, you updated F::Q to version 1.18.
+ Make shure, you updated F::Q to version 1.18.
</para>
</entry>
</row>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_txf-categories.xml b/help/C/Help_txf-categories.xml
index 5b3c312..fbf5614 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_txf-categories.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_txf-categories.xml
@@ -983,6 +983,6 @@ The fair market value of donated property, such as used clothing or furniture.</
</tgroup>
</table>
</para>
-<para>Source:
+<para>Source:
<ulink url="https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash/blob/maint/src/tax/us/txf-help.scm"></ulink>
</para>
commit 81bf95e63505cf9f20c23b1e9f61012c66ab2310
Author: goodvibes2 <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
Date: Thu Oct 27 14:33:00 2016 +1100
Whitespace cleanup guide
diff --git a/guide/C/appendixa.xml b/guide/C/appendixa.xml
index bc8ce92..804bf04 100644
--- a/guide/C/appendixa.xml
+++ b/guide/C/appendixa.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ You also have the option in <application>&app;</application> to treat income and
<sect1 id="appendixa_xmlconvert1">
<title>Converting <acronym>XML</acronym> <application>&app;</application> File</title>
<para>The <application>&app;</application> <acronym>XML</acronym> data file can be transformed to almost any other data
-format (e.g., <acronym>QIF</acronym>, <acronym>CSV</acronym>...) quite easily if one is familiar with <acronym>XSLT</acronym>.
+format (e.g., <acronym>QIF</acronym>, <acronym>CSV</acronym>...) quite easily if one is familiar with <acronym>XSLT</acronym>.
The <application>&app;</application> data file is well-formed <acronym>XML</acronym>, and it can therefore be run
through an <acronym>XSLT</acronym> parser with an associated stylesheet. This allows one
to transform the file to just about any format that can be designed,
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ working on a <acronym>CSV</acronym> one).</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Install an <acronym>XSLT</acronym> processor such as Saxon
-(http://saxon.sourceforge.net/) or Xalan-J (http://xml.apache.org/).
+(http://saxon.sourceforge.net/) or Xalan-J (http://xml.apache.org/).
Any conforming processor will do, really...</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ routine to do this transformation. Anyone who knows or can learn <acronym>XML</
and <acronym>XSLT</acronym> can perform this task. Not much harder, really, than writing a
Web page....</para>
-<para>Anyhow, I just wanted this tidbit to be captured somewhere permanently.
+<para>Anyhow, I just wanted this tidbit to be captured somewhere permanently.
The process works on &vers-stable; datafiles, and ought to
work on earlier versions, too.</para>
diff --git a/guide/C/appendixb.xml b/guide/C/appendixb.xml
index 9b2d261..d13f60d 100644
--- a/guide/C/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/C/appendixb.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
diff --git a/guide/C/appendixc.xml b/guide/C/appendixc.xml
index b08e837..04bf090 100644
--- a/guide/C/appendixc.xml
+++ b/guide/C/appendixc.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Expenses [E]
|___ Software
|___ Subscriptions
|___ Sundry
- |___ Travel / Accom
+ |___ Travel / Accom
</literallayout>
diff --git a/guide/C/appendixd.xml b/guide/C/appendixd.xml
index 1f1247e..f2d3d1f 100644
--- a/guide/C/appendixd.xml
+++ b/guide/C/appendixd.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: March 18th, 2007
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
David Hampton <hampton at employees.org>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
index 9485926..ac0d9fc 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.2.1
Last modified: September 26, 2010
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Tom Bullock <tbullock at nd.edu>
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Authors:
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Translators:
Equity.</para>
<para><guilabel>Expense</guilabel> refers to money you spend to purchase
- goods or services provided by someone else
+ goods or services provided by someone else
<emphasis>for early consumption</emphasis>. Examples of expenses are a
meal at a restaurant, rent, groceries, gas for your car, or tickets to
see a play. Expenses will always decrease your Equity. If you pay for
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Translators:
<!--
Translators:
Your language might have a generic term for 'income and expense'.
- Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
+ Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
and replace 'income and expense' by it in the latter sections of this book.
-->
</sect2>
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Translators:
information. Funds represent ownership shares of a variety of
investments, and like stocks they do not offer any guaranteed cash
value.</para>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Stock and
Mutual Fund the same.
</para>
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Translators:
is typically a business use only account in which you place
outstanding debts owed to you. It is considered an asset because you
should be able to count on these funds arriving.</para>
-
+
<para>Transactions involving an Accounts Receivable account should not be added,
changed or deleted in any way other than by using
</para>
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Translators:
<para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Cash,
Bank and Asset the same.
</para>
-
+
<para>Accounts are repositories of information used to track or record
the kinds of actions that occur related to the purpose for which the
account is established.</para>
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Translators:
all other loans, generally larger long-term loans such as a mortgage
or vehicle loan. This account can help you keep track of how much
you owe and how much you have already repaid.</para>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Credit
Card and Liability the same.
</para>
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Translators:
worth.</para>
<para>There is usually only a single <application>&app;</application> equity account, called naturally
- enough, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>.
+ enough, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>.
For companies, cooperatives etc. you can create a subaccount for each partner.</para>
<tip>
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Translators:
<tip>
<para>Credits increase income account balances and debits decrease
- them. As described in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1"></xref>,
+ them. As described in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1"></xref>,
credits represent money transferred
<emphasis>from</emphasis> an account. So in these special income
accounts, when you transfer money <emphasis>from</emphasis> (credit)
@@ -371,9 +371,9 @@ Translators:
<para>Below are the standard <guilabel>Income</guilabel> and
<guilabel>Expense</guilabel> accounts after selecting <guilabel>Common
Accounts</guilabel> in the assistant for creating a new Account Hierarchy
- (<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account
+ (<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account
Hierarchy...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="accts-DefaultIncomeAccounts">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Translators:
accounts</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
+ </screenshot>
<screenshot id="accts-DefaultExpenseAccounts">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -409,24 +409,24 @@ Translators:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="accts-other-types">
<title>Other Account Types</title>
-
+
<para>There are some special other account types.</para>
-
+
<para><emphasis>Trading</emphasis> Multiple currency transactions have
splits in <quote>Trading</quote> accounts to make the transaction
balance in each currency as well as in total value. See
<xref linkend="chapter_currency" /> for more information.
</para>
-
+
<para><emphasis>Money Market</emphasis> and <emphasis>Credit Line
</emphasis>are used only in the OFX importer, apparently for
completeness with the specification.
</para>
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="accts-examples1">
@@ -471,15 +471,15 @@ Translators:
building a <application>&app;</application> chart of accounts, and it is highly recommended that
you always begin this way.</para>
- <para>Start with a clean <application>&app;</application> file by selecting
- <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu. The
- <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant will start. Press <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close
+ <para>Start with a clean <application>&app;</application> file by selecting
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu. The
+ <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant will start. Press <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close
the assistant as we don’t want to use one of the predefined accounts structure; instead we will build a basic
- starting account structure from scratch. In the empty <application>&app;</application> window select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu:
- the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab will open. Finally select
+ starting account structure from scratch. In the empty <application>&app;</application> window select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu:
+ the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab will open. Finally select
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
+
<para>Now you are ready to build this basic starting account structure</para>
<orderedlist>
@@ -564,9 +564,9 @@ Translators:
<tip>
<para>Instead of selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
from the menu, you can alternatively create a new sub-account of an account by right clicking
- on the main account’s name and selecting the <guilabel>New Account...</guilabel> entry.
+ on the main account’s name and selecting the <guilabel>New Account...</guilabel> entry.
This will open a dialog similar to the one depicted in
- <xref linkend="accts-examples-toplevel2" /> where the new sub-account will be already set as a
+ <xref linkend="accts-examples-toplevel2" /> where the new sub-account will be already set as a
child of the main account.</para>
</tip>
<orderedlist>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index e9ebeab..fb65158 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@
modified: October 25th 2010
modified: January 12th 2007
modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
- Cristian Marchi <cri.penta at gmail.com>
+ Maintainers:
+ Cristian Marchi <cri.penta at gmail.com>
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -161,14 +161,14 @@
debits increase the balance and credits decrease the balance. In
liability, equity and income accounts, credits increase the balance
and debits decrease the balance.</para>
-
+
<para>In traditional double-entry accounting, the left column in the
register is used for debits, while the right column is used for credits.
Accountants record increases in asset and expense accounts on the
debit (left) side, and they record increases in liability, revenue, and equity
accounts on the credit (right) side. <application>&app;</application>
- follows this convention in the register.</para>
-
+ follows this convention in the register.</para>
+
<note>
<para>This accounting terminology can be confusing to new users,
which is why <application>&app;</application> allows you to use the
@@ -182,8 +182,8 @@
</note>
<warning>
- <para>Common use of the words <emphasis>debit</emphasis> and <emphasis>credit</emphasis>
- does not match how accountants use these words. In common use,
+ <para>Common use of the words <emphasis>debit</emphasis> and <emphasis>credit</emphasis>
+ does not match how accountants use these words. In common use,
<emphasis>credit</emphasis> generally has positive associations; in accounting,
<emphasis>credit</emphasis> means
<emphasis>affecting the right column</emphasis> of the ledger sheet of an account.
@@ -282,8 +282,8 @@
and depositing a paycheck. <xref linkend="chapter_txns"/> goes more
in depth on how to enter transactions.</para>
- <para>In <link linkend="basics-accountingdouble2">double entry accounting</link>,
- transactions always involve at least two accounts–a source
+ <para>In <link linkend="basics-accountingdouble2">double entry accounting</link>,
+ transactions always involve at least two accounts–a source
account and a destination account.
<application>&app;</application> manages this by inserting a line
into the transaction for every account that is affected, and
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@
transaction that records the account and amount of money involved is
called a <firstterm>split</firstterm>. A transaction can contain an
arbitrary number of splits.</para>
- <note>
+ <note>
<para>Splits in transactions will be covered in <xref
linkend="txns-registers-multiaccount2"/></para>
</note>
@@ -375,14 +375,14 @@
<tip>
<para>Clicking the small triangle to the left of an account that has children will expand the tree view showing child accounts.</para>
</tip>
-
+
<para>At the top of this window is the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, which displays the
file name for this set of accounts (once you have saved the file.) Below that is the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>.
You can access the menu options by either clicking on these menu
- headings or by using shortcuts and access keys (see <xref linkend="basics-shortcut2" />).
+ headings or by using shortcuts and access keys (see <xref linkend="basics-shortcut2" />).
Next is the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, which contains buttons
for the most common functions.</para>
-
+
<para>The account tree appears below the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. Once you have
started creating accounts, the account names will appear in the account
tree. You can customize which headings show up by using the
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/basics_CheckAccount.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" width="510"></imagedata>
</imageobject>
-
+
<imageobject role="fo">
<imagedata fileref="figures/basics_CheckAccount.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" ></imagedata>
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- <para><xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref> explains more about account
+ <para><xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref> explains more about account
register windows and how to
enter data into them. For now, note that the parts of an account
register window are similar to the parts of the account tree window
@@ -433,12 +433,12 @@
Below that, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> contains menu options related to the account
register. <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> buttons simplify common data entry functions. The
<emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> at the bottom of the window, displays some account balances
- covered in <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>. At the bottom of the
+ covered in <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>. At the bottom of the
account register window,
information appears about the current location of the cursor.</para>
-
+
<note>
- <para>In the register windows, you can resize the various columns that
+ <para>In the register windows, you can resize the various columns that
<application>&app;</application> displays, <emphasis>but keep in mind that
the Description and Balance columns behave differently from other columns</emphasis>.</para>
<para>The <guilabel>Description</guilabel> column is designed to expand
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@
<para>The <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> column must be resized by
double-clicking on the column heading.</para>
</note>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-toolbar2">
@@ -485,23 +485,23 @@
<term><guibutton>Open</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
<guibutton>New</guibutton> and <guibutton>Delete</guibutton></term>
<listitem>
- <para>These are functions related to accounts. They are discussed in
+ <para>These are functions related to accounts. They are discussed in
<xref linkend="chapter_accts"></xref>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
-
+
<para>Register-specific buttons are discussed in <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-tabbar">
<title>Tab Bar</title>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> uses a tabbed model that allows you to open multiple account registers and reports simultaneously. Each open window (which can include account registers, reports, or Scheduled Transactions windows) is given a tab on this bar that you can click to view that window. Tabs can be configured in Preferences to appear along any side of the <application>&app;</application> window.</para>
-
+
<para>To see the full name for a tab, hover the mouse pointer over an account window tab.</para>
-
+
<para>If more screens are open than can be displayed across the screen, some tabs
will not display. You can move through all tabs by clicking the arrows on
either end of the tab bar. A complete list of tabs can be viewed by
@@ -621,10 +621,10 @@
<title>Storing your financial data</title>
<para><application>&app;</application> is able to <link linkend="basics-store-data">store</link>
- your financial data in files or <acronym>SQL</acronym> databases so that they can be
- <link linkend="basics-open-data">opened</link> and modified at a later time.
+ your financial data in files or <acronym>SQL</acronym> databases so that they can be
+ <link linkend="basics-open-data">opened</link> and modified at a later time.
But first you need to <link linkend="basics-create-data">create</link> a container for your data.</para>
-
+
<sect2 id="basics-create-data">
<title>Creating a file</title>
<para>To create a new <application>&app;</application> file do the following:</para>
@@ -635,21 +635,21 @@
<guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. The <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy setup</guilabel>
assistant will start.</para>
<note>
- <para>If you are running <application>&app;</application> for the first time, you will be presented
- with the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. This screen is described in detail in the
+ <para>If you are running <application>&app;</application> for the first time, you will be presented
+ with the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. This screen is described in detail in the
<application>&app;</application> manual.</para>
</note>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Set your preferences in the assistant and move through the screens with the
+ <para>Set your preferences in the assistant and move through the screens with the
<guibutton>Forward</guibutton>, <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> and <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
buttons.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="basics-store-data">
<title>Saving data</title>
<para>Follow these steps to save the file under your preferred name:</para>
@@ -663,11 +663,11 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Select the <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> of the file you are saving from the
- drop down list. The default selection is <acronym>XML</acronym> but if you have set up a
+ <para>Select the <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> of the file you are saving from the
+ drop down list. The default selection is <acronym>XML</acronym> but if you have set up a
database back end you can change to that format.</para>
- <para>Depending on the selected <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> the window can change as
- described in the following.</para>
+ <para>Depending on the selected <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> the window can change as
+ described in the following.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -695,21 +695,21 @@
</textobject>
<caption>
- <para>This image shows the <guilabel>Save</guilabel> screen when the selected
+ <para>This image shows the <guilabel>Save</guilabel> screen when the selected
<guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> is <acronym>XML</acronym> or <acronym>sqlite3</acronym>.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
- <para>Type your chosen filename in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. It is not necessary to specify an
- extension when you write the file name. <application>&app;</application> will automatically add the extension
+ <para>Type your chosen filename in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. It is not necessary to specify an
+ extension when you write the file name. <application>&app;</application> will automatically add the extension
<filename>.gnucash</filename> to the file.</para>
<note>
<para>The <filename>.gnucash</filename> extension was introduced in the 2.3 series of <application>&app;</application>.
- For already existing files, the extension will never be changed. So if you open an existing file named
- <filename>Myoldfile</filename>, that name won’t be changed if the file is saved. You might use the
- <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> command and give the file a new name in order to have it saved with the
+ For already existing files, the extension will never be changed. So if you open an existing file named
+ <filename>Myoldfile</filename>, that name won’t be changed if the file is saved. You might use the
+ <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> command and give the file a new name in order to have it saved with the
extension <filename>.gnucash</filename>.</para>
</note>
<para>Select the path where the file will be saved by browsing the tree in the lower panes.</para>
@@ -718,13 +718,13 @@
custom name in the selected path.</para>
</tip>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>If you selected <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym>
<guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> you will see a screen like this:</para>
<figure>
- <title>Save screen when <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym> is selected.</title>
+ <title>Save screen when <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym> is selected.</title>
<screenshot id="basics-SaveSQL">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject role="html">
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@
</textobject>
<caption>
- <para>This image shows the <guilabel>Save</guilabel> screen when the selected
+ <para>This image shows the <guilabel>Save</guilabel> screen when the selected
<guilabel>Data Format</guilabel> is <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym>.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -750,11 +750,11 @@
</figure>
<para>Enter in this window the <guilabel>Database Connection</guilabel> information:
- <guilabel>Host</guilabel>, <guilabel>Database</guilabel>, <guilabel>Username</guilabel>
+ <guilabel>Host</guilabel>, <guilabel>Database</guilabel>, <guilabel>Username</guilabel>
and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para>
<warning>
- <para>Saving to <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym> requires the proper permissions in that
- database, that is you need to have the permissions to create a new database with the given database name, or
+ <para>Saving to <acronym>mysql</acronym> or <acronym>postgres</acronym> requires the proper permissions in that
+ database, that is you need to have the permissions to create a new database with the given database name, or
you need to have write access to an existing database with the given database name.</para>
</warning>
</listitem>
@@ -779,7 +779,7 @@
<note>
<para>As it is very important to save your data frequently to avoid losing them for whatever reason,
<application>&app;</application> is able to automatically save the opened file every a certain amount of time.
- This interval can be set in the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab under
+ This interval can be set in the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab under
<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(<menuchoice><guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).
Keep in mind that this option is relevant only if you are saving in <acronym>XML</acronym> format.
@@ -788,13 +788,13 @@
</note>
</para>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="basics-open-data">
<title>Opening data</title>
<para>To open an existing file or database, select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu. In the window that will open,
select the <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel>. If you selected <guilabel>File</guilabel> choose the file you want to open
- by browsing the folders in the lower panes. Else, enter the required <guilabel>Database Connection</guilabel>
+ by browsing the folders in the lower panes. Else, enter the required <guilabel>Database Connection</guilabel>
information.</para>
<tip>
<para><application>&app;</application> keeps a list of the recently opened files. Open the <guilabel>File</guilabel>
@@ -804,15 +804,15 @@
<sect2 id="basics-expt-acct">
<title>Duplicating an Account Hierarchy</title>
- <para>In some cases, it might be useful to duplicate the structure of an existing data file in a new file.
- For example, you might want to try out new accounting techniques without corrupting your actual
+ <para>In some cases, it might be useful to duplicate the structure of an existing data file in a new file.
+ For example, you might want to try out new accounting techniques without corrupting your actual
accounting data, or you might need to follow accounting guidelines that require you to close your books at the end
of the year and begin each year with a fresh set of books.</para>
<para><application>&app;</application> allows you to create an empty copy of your Chart of Accounts simply by selecting
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Export</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Export Accounts</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
When you select this command, you are asked to provide the name for the new empty file, and <application>&app;</application>
- creates a new data file that contains only your account hierarchy (that is, there is no transaction data).
+ creates a new data file that contains only your account hierarchy (that is, there is no transaction data).
Once saved, the new file can be opened like any other <application>&app;</application> data file as described above.</para>
</sect2>
@@ -824,15 +824,15 @@
<para><application>&app;</application> creates several types of files to help ensure that your data
is not lost. If you look in the folder where your saved file resides, you may see other
files generated by <application>&app;</application> with the following extensions: <filename>.gnucash</filename>,
- <filename>.log</filename>, <filename>.LCK</filename>, <filename>.LNK</filename> in the same directory
+ <filename>.log</filename>, <filename>.LCK</filename>, <filename>.LNK</filename> in the same directory
as your primary data file. What each of these files does is presented below.</para>
-
+
<note>
<para>The following sections are relevant only if you are saving your financial data in the <acronym>XML</acronym> format</para>
</note>
-
+
<programlisting>
- $ ls
+ $ ls
myfile.gnucash
myfile.gnucash.20100414185747.gnucash
myfile.gnucash.20100414223248.log
@@ -852,17 +852,17 @@
your previous data file, and the filename format refers to the data
file, year, month, day and time of the backup. For example, the filename
<filename>myfile.gnucash.20100414185747.gnucash</filename> indicates this is a
- backup copy of the file <filename>myfile</filename> saved in the year
+ backup copy of the file <filename>myfile</filename> saved in the year
2010, April 14, at 6:57:47 p.m.</para>
<para>To restore an old backup file, simply open the <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gnucash</filename> file with the
date to which you wish to return. Be sure to save this file under a
different name.</para>
-
+
<note>
<para>
- <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xac</filename> instead of the actual extension <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gnucash</filename>.
- So if you upgrade from the 2.2 series to the 2.4 series, you may end up with both <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xac</filename>
+ <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xac</filename> instead of the actual extension <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gnucash</filename>.
+ So if you upgrade from the 2.2 series to the 2.4 series, you may end up with both <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.xac</filename>
and <filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gnucash</filename> backup files in your directory.</para>
</note>
</sect2>
@@ -870,8 +870,8 @@
<sect2 id="basics-backuplog2">
<title>Log file (.log)</title>
- <para>Each time you open and edit a file in <application>&app;</application>,
- <application>&app;</application> creates a log file of changes you have made to your data file.
+ <para>Each time you open and edit a file in <application>&app;</application>,
+ <application>&app;</application> creates a log file of changes you have made to your data file.
The log file uses a similar naming format as the backup files:
<filename>.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.log</filename>. Log files
are not a full backup of your data file - they simply record changes you
@@ -888,7 +888,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
+ <para>Go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Replay &app; .log file</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
and select the one .log file with the same date as the saved file
you just opened. Make sure that you picked the right .log file, or
@@ -956,20 +956,20 @@
<guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(<menuchoice><guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).</para>
</note>
-
+
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="basics-migrate-settings">
<title>Migrating <application>&app;</application> data</title>
<para>Sometimes you may need to move your financial data and <application>&app;</application> settings to another machine.
- Typical use cases are when you buy a new computer or if you want to use the same settings over two different operating
+ Typical use cases are when you buy a new computer or if you want to use the same settings over two different operating
systems in a dual boot configuration.</para>
<sect2 id="migrate-financial">
<title>Migrating financial data</title>
- <para>Migrating <application>&app;</application> financial data is a as simple as copying <filename>.gnucash</filename>
- files with a file manager if you know where they are saved. If you can’t remember where a file is stored
+ <para>Migrating <application>&app;</application> financial data is a as simple as copying <filename>.gnucash</filename>
+ files with a file manager if you know where they are saved. If you can’t remember where a file is stored
but you can open it directly within <application>&app;</application>, save it in the desired path from within
<application>&app;</application>.</para>
@@ -979,17 +979,17 @@
<sect2 id="migrate-prefs">
<title>Migrating preferences data</title>
- <para>Preferences are stored in three different locations: one for <application>&app;</application> preferences,
+ <para>Preferences are stored in three different locations: one for <application>&app;</application> preferences,
one for reports, and one for online banking settings. Preferences are managed by
- <application>gsettings</application>, reports are managed by <application>&app;</application>
+ <application>gsettings</application>, reports are managed by <application>&app;</application>
itself, and online banking is managed by <application>aqbanking</application>. If you do not use online banking,
then you will not have this folder on your machine.</para>
<para>Where the <application>&app;</application> preferences are stored varies
- depending on your operating system (see <xref linkend="App-sett-loc" />, <xref linkend="Report-loc" />, and
+ depending on your operating system (see <xref linkend="App-sett-loc" />, <xref linkend="Report-loc" />, and
<xref linkend="OB-sett-loc" />). To back up and transfer your entire installation, you must copy
these preferences as well.</para>
-
+
<table id="App-sett-loc"><title>Application Settings Locations</title>
<tgroup cols="2" align="left">
<thead>
@@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@
</thead>
<tbody>
<row>
- <entry>Unix</entry>
+ <entry>Unix</entry>
<entry><application>&app;</application> preferences are stored in <application>dconf</application>.
You can use the commands <code>dconf dump /org/gnucash/</code> on the old machine
and <code>dconf load /org/gnucash/</code> on the new machine to migrate your preferences.</entry>
@@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@
<row>
<entry>Windows</entry>
<entry><filename class="directory">Documents and Settings/Username/.aqbanking</filename></entry>
- </row>
+ </row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
@@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@
</note>
<tip>
- <para>On Unix and Mac OSX, the <keycap>~</keycap> symbol means the
+ <para>On Unix and Mac OSX, the <keycap>~</keycap> symbol means the
<filename class="directory">home</filename> folder.</para>
</tip>
@@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@
you to create several accounts at once.</para>
<note>
<para>If you are running <application>&app;</application> for the first time, you will be presented with the
- <guilabel>Cannot find default values</guilabel> screen which is described in details in the
+ <guilabel>Cannot find default values</guilabel> screen which is described in details in the
<application>&app;</application> manual.</para>
</note>
@@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/basics_NewAccountHierarchySetup.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" ></imagedata>
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The New Account Hierarchy Setup assistant</phrase>
</textobject>
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
<para>The first screen of the assistant gives you a description of what the assistant does.
Click the <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button to proceed to the next screen.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@
<para>The currency you select here, will be assigned to all the
<guilabel>accounts</guilabel> created in this assistant.</para>
</note>
-
+
<screenshot id="basics-NewAccountHierarchySetup-currency">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject role="html">
@@ -1175,10 +1175,10 @@
then press the <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.
You can also update these options later using <menuchoice><guimenu>File
</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
- For details of these options, see the <application>&app;</application>
- Help manual, chapter Customizing GnuCash, Book Options.
+ For details of these options, see the <application>&app;</application>
+ Help manual, chapter Customizing GnuCash, Book Options.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="basics-NewBookOptions">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject role="html">
@@ -1205,7 +1205,7 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>In the fourth screen select the <guilabel>Common Accounts</guilabel> group in the
+ <para>In the fourth screen select the <guilabel>Common Accounts</guilabel> group in the
<guilabel>Categories</guilabel> pane. Then press the <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button to
proceed.</para>
<note>
@@ -1237,15 +1237,15 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
<listitem>
<para>In the fifth screen you will be able to set an <guilabel>Opening
Balance</guilabel> on each of the accounts, as well as indicate if
- the account should be a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel>. As these features will be
- described in next chapters, leave all as configured by <application>&app;</application>
+ the account should be a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel>. As these features will be
+ described in next chapters, leave all as configured by <application>&app;</application>
and click <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> to open the last screen of the assistant.</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="basics-NewAccountHierarchySetup-Setup.png">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject role="html">
@@ -1300,10 +1300,10 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>After pressing <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> in the previous window, you will be
+ <para>After pressing <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> in the previous window, you will be
presented with the save dialog. Select the <acronym>XML</acronym> <guilabel>Data Format</guilabel>,
- <guilabel>Name</guilabel> the file as <filename>gcashdata_1</filename>, select the folder where to
- save the file (remember it as the data file will be used in the tutorials throughout this manual),
+ <guilabel>Name</guilabel> the file as <filename>gcashdata_1</filename>, select the folder where to
+ save the file (remember it as the data file will be used in the tutorials throughout this manual),
and finally press the <guibutton>Save as</guibutton> button.</para>
<para>Your main window should now look something like this:</para>
@@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/basics_EmptyAccounts.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
</imageobject>
-
+
<imageobject role="fo">
<imagedata fileref="figures/basics_EmptyAccounts.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" ></imagedata>
@@ -1326,8 +1326,8 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
-
+
</orderedlist>
-
+
</sect1>
</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_budgets.xml b/guide/C/ch_budgets.xml
index bed5d37..d109cfa 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_budgets.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_budgets.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Shoemaker <c.shoemaker at cox.net>
Author:
Chris Shoemaker <c.shoemaker at cox.net>
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
<chapter id="chapter_budgets">
<title>Budgets</title>
<para>
- This chapter explains how to create and use budgets with <application>&app;</application>.
+ This chapter explains how to create and use budgets with <application>&app;</application>.
</para>
<sect1 id="budget_concepts1">
<title>Basic Concepts</title>
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ guide will help you make some of those decisions.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="budget_creation1">
- <title>Creating a Budget</title>
+ <title>Creating a Budget</title>
<para>Even before you begin to make a budget, it’s important to
have given some thought to your account hierarchy. For example, if
you want to budget a certain amount for your electric bill and a
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ guide will help you make some of those decisions.</para>
<para>The budget page now shows a list of accounts with a column
for each budget period. The date shown in the title of each
column is the beginning of that budget period.</para>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>Entering Budget Values</title>
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ guide will help you make some of those decisions.</para>
account from Jan. 1, 2005 through Dec. 31, 2005.</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="budget_reporting1">
<title>Budget Reporting</title>
<para>You’ve already done the hardest part - creating your budget.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_ap.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_ap.xml
index 03b2879..95be8f9 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_ap.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_ap.xml
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Originally designed by Carol Champagne.
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: Sep 19th 2015
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
-->
<!--
-A lot of the following text is duplicated in the GnuCash help. The text here in the guide should be
+A lot of the following text is duplicated in the GnuCash help. The text here in the guide should be
corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
-->
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<para>Accounts Payable (or A/P) refers to the accounting of products or services which a company has
bought and needs to pay for.
</para>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-ap-setup1">
<title>Initial Setup</title>
<para>Perform set up tasks listed in <xref linkend="chapter_bus_setup" />.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<sect1 id="bus-ap-components1">
<title>System Components</title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> has an integrated accounts payable system. The transactions generated by the A/P system are placed within the Accounts Payable account,
+ <para><application>&app;</application> has an integrated accounts payable system. The transactions generated by the A/P system are placed within the Accounts Payable account,
as a record of what occurs. Generally you do not directly work with this account but use the four integrated <application>&app;</application> A/P application components.
The A/P components are available from the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu></menuchoice> sub-menu. These A/P components are:
</para>
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Vendors</guilabel> are people or companies from which you buy products or services on credit.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Bills</guilabel> represent the physical bills vendors send to request payment from you. A bill contains an itemized list of things you purchased.</para>
<para>In addition, GnuCash also has support for <guilabel>Credit Notes</guilabel>
@@ -50,24 +50,24 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
</para>
<para>Both document types will be set up using the same menu items.</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Jobs</guilabel> (optional) is where you register Vendor Jobs. Jobs are mechanism by which you can group multiple bills from a particular vendor.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Process Payments</guilabel> is where you register payments to a vendor to whom you owe money.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>The following sections introduce the individual Accounts Payable application components.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="bus-ap-vendors1">
<title>Vendors</title>
<para>A vendor is a company or person from whom you purchase goods or services. Vendors must be registered within the A/P system.</para>
-
+
<sect2 id="bus-ap-vendornew2">
<title>New</title>
<para>To register a new vendor, select the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>
@@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="bus-ap-vendorfind2">
<title>Find and Edit</title>
<para>To search for an existing vendor, use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>
- Find Vendor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> window. You select a vendor to <guibutton>View/Edit</guibutton> from the results of the search.
+ Find Vendor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> window. You select a vendor to <guibutton>View/Edit</guibutton> from the results of the search.
This window is also used to look up a vendor when entering bills and processing payments.
</para>
<screenshot id="bus-ar-vendorfind">
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
</sect2>
<sect2 id="bus-ap-billedit2">
- <title>Edit</title>
+ <title>Edit</title>
<para>From the Edit Bill window you can enter an itemized list of
goods and services you purchased, in a manner similar to how the account
register works. For credit notes you enter an itemized list of goods and
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
you can close it and return to it later. You have to post the bill eventually. Posting a bill places its transactions into an accounts payable account.
The Post Bill window appears and asks you to enter information:
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="bus-ap-billpost">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -230,15 +230,15 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<sect1 id="bus-ap-jobs1">
<title>Vendor Jobs</title>
- <para>Vendor Jobs are used to group multiple bills and credit notes from a single vendor. Use of the vendor jobs feature is optional.
- The feature is useful when you have multiple <guilabel>jobs</guilabel> for the same vendor, and would like to view all the bills and
+ <para>Vendor Jobs are used to group multiple bills and credit notes from a single vendor. Use of the vendor jobs feature is optional.
+ The feature is useful when you have multiple <guilabel>jobs</guilabel> for the same vendor, and would like to view all the bills and
credit notes for a single job.
</para>
- <para>To use vendor jobs, you must create them using the
+ <para>To use vendor jobs, you must create them using the
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>New Job</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice> menu item. You will see the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="bus-ap-jobnew">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<sect1 id="bus-ap-payment1">
<title>Process Payment</title>
- <para>Eventually, you need to pay your bills. To do so, use the Process Payment application found in
+ <para>Eventually, you need to pay your bills. To do so, use the Process Payment application found in
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Process Payment</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice>.
</para>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_ar.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_ar.xml
index 1820292..9fa556d 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_ar.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_ar.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
-->
<!--
-A lot of the following text is duplicated in the GnuCash help. The text here in the guide should be
+A lot of the following text is duplicated in the GnuCash help. The text here in the guide should be
corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
-->
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-ar-components1">
<title>System Components</title>
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
<para>You can change the starting invoice number if it is important you.
Use <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, access
the <guilabel>Counters</guilabel> tab, change the <guilabel>Invoice number</guilabel> value to be
- one less than your desired starting invoice number and click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the
+ one less than your desired starting invoice number and click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button.</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- <para>Give a <guilabel>Name</guilabel> to the new style sheet (e.g. <guilabel>Custom Invoice</guilabel>) and select the
+ <para>Give a <guilabel>Name</guilabel> to the new style sheet (e.g. <guilabel>Custom Invoice</guilabel>) and select the
<guilabel>Fancy</guilabel> <guilabel>Template</guilabel>. When you click the
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, the <guilabel>HTML Style Sheet Properties</guilabel> window is
displayed. This window presents you five sections listed in the left pane: <guilabel>Colors</guilabel>, <guilabel>Fonts</guilabel>,
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ corrected to be less describing of the interface and more tutorial oriented
Tile, Heading Banner, and Logo.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
<note>
<para>The images are placed in the invoice as follows. The
<guilabel>Background Tile</guilabel> is tiled to become the background
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_intro.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_intro.xml
index f973e7f..8f26ff6 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_intro.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_intro.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 1.0.0
Last modified: Sep 19th 2015
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Good <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
Author:
Chris Good <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
<chapter id="chapter_bus_intro">
<title>Business Introduction</title>
-
+
<!-- <sect1 id="bus-intro">
<title>Introduction to Business Features</title>
-->
@@ -21,22 +21,22 @@
a person. Businesses have customers that owe money, vendors which are owed
money, employee payroll, more complex tax laws, etc. <application>&app;</application> offers
business oriented features to facilitate these needs.</para>
-
+
<para><emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis> (A/R) are used by businesses to record sales for
which they are not immediately paid. This is represented on the balance sheet as an asset,
because the expectation is that you will receive payment soon.
</para>
-
- <para><emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> (A/P) record bills that businesses have received, but may not pay until later.
+
+ <para><emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> (A/P) record bills that businesses have received, but may not pay until later.
This is represented on the balance sheet as a liability because you will have to pay for them.
</para>
-
+
<para>A/R and A/P accounts are used primarily when you have a lot of bills and receipts
flowing in and out, and do not want to lose track of them just because you
do not pay or get paid right away. For most home users, A/R and A/P are
too complicated to be worthwhile.
</para>
-
+
<!-- </sect1>
-->
</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_pay.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_pay.xml
index 789da47..ca13147 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_pay.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_pay.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
(<emphasis>Expenses:Salaries</emphasis> for example) and use reports to
view per-employee information.
</para>
-
+
<para>The Transaction report can be used to sort and total by description or
memo (but not by part of them).
</para>
-
+
<para>
To report on the Salaries transactions for a specific employee where the
employee name or code is entered in the transaction description or memo,
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-pay-example1">
<title>Example</title>
<para>Using the account setup seen previously, let’s go through an example. Assume that there are 2 employees (E1 and E2) which each earn $1000 per month gross salary. The employee contribution to Tax1 and Tax2 are 10% and 5% respectively. The company contribution to Tax1 and Tax2 are 15% and 10% each on top of the employees gross salary.</para>
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
<screenshot id="bus-pay-ex1">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex1.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex1.png"
srccredit="Patrick Schweiger" format="PNG"/>
</imageobject>
<textobject>
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
<screenshot id="bus-pay-ex2">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex2.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex2.png"
srccredit="Patrick Schweiger" format="PNG"/>
</imageobject>
<textobject>
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
<screenshot id="bus-pay-ex3">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex3.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex3.png"
srccredit="Patrick Schweiger" format="PNG"/>
</imageobject>
<textobject>
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Simple Payroll Account Layout:
<screenshot id="bus-pay-ex4">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex4.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/bus_pay_ex4.png"
srccredit="Patrick Schweiger" format="PNG"/>
</imageobject>
<textobject>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_setup.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_setup.xml
index de895fd..38ff023 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_setup.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_setup.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 1.0.0
Last modified: Sep 19th 2015
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Good <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
Author:
Chris Good <chris.good at ozemail.com.au>
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
<chapter id="chapter_bus_setup">
<title>Business Setup</title>
-
+
<para>To set up <application>&app;</application> to handle accounts receivable or accounts payable
for a company, these preliminary steps must be done.
<itemizedlist>
@@ -79,17 +79,17 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
customer. <application>&app;</application> keeps track of customers internally and provides
per-customer reports based on the internal tracking. The same applies to A/P and vendors.
</para>
-
+
<para>
- If you deal with customers in more than one currency you will need a separate
+ If you deal with customers in more than one currency you will need a separate
<emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis> account for each currency.
</para>
<para>
- If you deal with vendors in more than one currency you will need a separate
+ If you deal with vendors in more than one currency you will need a separate
<emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> account for each currency.
</para>
-
+
<para>Transactions involving an Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable account should not be
added, changed or deleted in any way other than by using
<itemizedlist>
@@ -97,21 +97,21 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
<listitem><para>process payment</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
-
+
</note>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-setuptaxtables">
<title>Tax Tables</title>
<para>Tax Tables can used to determine the tax for customer invoices (or vendor bills).
</para>
-
+
<para> A tax table can be assigned to an invoice line or bill line.</para>
-
+
<para>Set up distinct tax tables for customers and vendors.</para>
- <para> The default invoice line tax table can be assigned to each customer and the default bill
+ <para> The default invoice line tax table can be assigned to each customer and the default bill
line tax table can be assigned to each vendor.
</para>
@@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</menuchoice>
</para>
- <para>Tax Tables are maintained using the <emphasis>Sales Tax Table</emphasis> editor which is accessed via menu
+ <para>Tax Tables are maintained using the <emphasis>Sales Tax Table</emphasis> editor which is accessed via menu
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sales Tax Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<figure pgwide="1">
<title>Tax Tables</title>
<screenshot id="bus-taxmain">
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
-
+
<figure pgwide="1">
<title>New Sales Tax Table</title>
<screenshot id="bus-taxnew">
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> This is the tax table name.</para>
@@ -196,17 +196,17 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-setupcname">
<title>Company Registration</title>
<para>After you have built the account structure and defined your tax tables, register the <application>&app;</application>
file as belonging to your company. To register your company, select the <guilabel>Business</guilabel> tab
- in the <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> window accessible by selecting
+ in the <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> window accessible by selecting
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<figure pgwide="1">
<title>Company Registration</title>
<screenshot id="bus-co-reg">
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
-
+
<para>Here you can:</para>
<itemizedlist>
@@ -247,9 +247,9 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
customers and vendors.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus_setup_pref">
<title>Business Preferences</title>
<para>Set options on the Business tab of the <application>&app;</application> preferences, which is
@@ -257,9 +257,9 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
(<menuchoice><guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).
See Help manual chapter 10.3.3 Business Book Options Tab.
</para>
-
+
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="bus-setupterms">
<title>Billing Terms</title>
@@ -268,12 +268,12 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</para>
<note>
- <para>As of <application>&app;</application> 2.6.7, Billing Terms are only
+ <para>As of <application>&app;</application> 2.6.7, Billing Terms are only
partially supported. Date due is calculated using the Billing Terms
but discount amount is not.
</para>
<para>
- Discount for early invoice payment is not implemented. There are 2 ways this may be done, although neither is recommended, and
+ Discount for early invoice payment is not implemented. There are 2 ways this may be done, although neither is recommended, and
professional advise should be used to confirm that regulations are being complied with:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
@@ -281,10 +281,10 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
and split the payment to reduce it by the amount of the discount and a create a compensating split in an income (discount) account.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
- <para>Alternatively, after creating and posting a payment for the discounted amount, create a credit note for the discount using a specific negative
- sales income (discount) account for the transfer account.
+ <para>Alternatively, after creating and posting a payment for the discounted amount, create a credit note for the discount using a specific negative
+ sales income (discount) account for the transfer account.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -295,11 +295,11 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
Invoice billing terms will default from the customer billing terms.
Bill billing terms will default from the vendor billing terms.
</para>
-
- <para>Billing Terms are maintained using the Billing Terms Editor which is accessed via menu
+
+ <para>Billing Terms are maintained using the Billing Terms Editor which is accessed via menu
<menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<figure pgwide="1">
<title>Billing Terms Editor</title>
<screenshot id="bus-termsmain">
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
-
+
<figure pgwide="1">
<title>New Billing Term</title>
<screenshot id="bus-termsnew">
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</figure>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> The internal name of the billing term. For some examples of billing term names and descriptions see
@@ -391,8 +391,8 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
+ </listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect1>
-
+
</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_capgain.xml b/guide/C/ch_capgain.xml
index 7c5a618..2fa8e8c 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_capgain.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_capgain.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@
<para>Below is a generic account hierarchy for tracking the appreciation
of 2 assets, <emphasis>ITEM1</emphasis> and <emphasis>ITEM2</emphasis>. The <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:ITEM1:Cost</emphasis> accounts are
- balanced by the <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis> account,
+ balanced by the <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis> account,
the <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:ITEM1:Unrealized Gains</emphasis>
accounts are balanced by the <emphasis>Income:Unrealized Gains</emphasis> account (similar for <emphasis>ITEM2</emphasis>).</para>
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@
-Current Assets
-Savings Account
-Fixed Assets
- -ITEM1
+ -ITEM1
-Cost
-Unrealized Gain
-ITEM2
@@ -235,15 +235,15 @@
<para>Your optimistic estimate of the painting’s value was correct.
First you must record that the profits made are now realized gains,
not unrealized gains. Do this by transferring the income from the
- <emphasis>Income:Unrealized Gains</emphasis> to the
+ <emphasis>Income:Unrealized Gains</emphasis> to the
<emphasis>Income:Realized Gains</emphasis> account.</para>
<para>Secondly, you must credit your bank account with the selling
price of the painting. This money comes directly from your
<emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:Degas</emphasis> sub-accounts. Transfer the full
- <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:Degas:Cost</emphasis> value into
- <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis>, and the full
- <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:Degas:Unrealized Gain</emphasis> into
+ <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:Degas:Cost</emphasis> value into
+ <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis>, and the full
+ <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:Degas:Unrealized Gain</emphasis> into
<emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis>.</para>
<para>These transactions should now appear as follows:</para>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_cbook.xml b/guide/C/ch_cbook.xml
index e047149..bd2c28d 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_cbook.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_cbook.xml
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: December 7th 2009
modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
first step of tracking your finances, and <application>&app;</application> makes it much easier to
manage than the traditional paper register does.</para>
- <para>For one thing, as discussed in <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>,
+ <para>For one thing, as discussed in <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>,
data entry of common
transactions is practically done for you in <application>&app;</application>, because of its
auto-completion feature. <application>&app;</application> keeps a running balance of each account,
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
<para>The first step in managing your checkbook is to set up the necessary
accounts. You can either use the default <application>&app;</application> accounts or set up your
- own. For more detail on how to set up a new account, refer to
+ own. For more detail on how to set up a new account, refer to
<xref linkend="accts-examples-toplevel2"></xref>.
For instructions on importing your accounts from another program, refer to the
<application>&app;</application> manual.</para>
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@
<tip>
<para>Be sure to check the Tax-Related box and assign an appropriate tax
- category in the Income Tax Information Dialog (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax
+ category in the Income Tax Information Dialog (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax
Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>)
when you set up taxable income accounts. Some types of income,
such as gift income, may not be considered taxable, so check the
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@
<title>Reconciling Your Accounts</title>
<para><application>&app;</application> makes reconciliation of your bank account with your monthly
- bank statement much easier. <xref linkend="txns-reconcile1"></xref>
+ bank statement much easier. <xref linkend="txns-reconcile1"></xref>
gives instructions on how to
reconcile your transactions with the monthly bank statement. This is the
main reconciliation task that should be done every month.</para>
@@ -178,8 +178,8 @@
should consider reconciling that account. Examples include the checking
account statement, the savings account statement, and the credit card
statement. Credit card statements and credit card transactions are covered
- in the <xref linkend="chapter_cc"></xref>, so if you are interested in
- tracking your credit cards in <application>&app;</application>, take a look at the instructions
+ in the <xref linkend="chapter_cc"></xref>, so if you are interested in
+ tracking your credit cards in <application>&app;</application>, take a look at the instructions
provided there.</para>
<para>Income and expense accounts are usually not reconciled, because
@@ -193,13 +193,13 @@
<sect1 id="cbook-together1">
<title>Putting It All Together</title>
- <para>In <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>, you entered some transactions
- in your checking account. In this chapter, we will add more transactions and
+ <para>In <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>, you entered some transactions
+ in your checking account. In this chapter, we will add more transactions and
then reconcile them.</para>
<sect2 id="cbook-puttoget-open2">
<title>Opening Balances</title>
-
+
<para>So, let’s get started by opening the gcashdata file you saved in the
last chapter (<filename>gcashdata_4</filename>). Your chart of accounts
should look like this:</para>
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_gcashdata4.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Chart of Accounts</phrase>
</textobject>
@@ -227,10 +227,10 @@
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
- <para>Now open the <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account from the main window. In the last
- chapter, you entered some paycheck transactions as deposits into
- Checking. Now we will enter another kind of deposit - a transfer of
- money from Savings into Checking. On a blank line, enter a transaction
+ <para>Now open the <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account from the main window. In the last
+ chapter, you entered some paycheck transactions as deposits into
+ Checking. Now we will enter another kind of deposit - a transfer of
+ money from Savings into Checking. On a blank line, enter a transaction
to transfer $500 from <emphasis>Savings</emphasis> to <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> (In this case, the last
transaction date was March 28, but this transfer transaction took
place on the March 24). Your Transfer account will be <emphasis>Savings</emphasis>, since
@@ -243,14 +243,14 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_transferin.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Checking Account Register</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the Checking Account Register.</para>
- </caption>
+ </caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
@@ -271,11 +271,11 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_checkexamp.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Checking Account Register</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the Checking Account Register after
registering some more checks.</para>
@@ -283,26 +283,26 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>Suppose you now need to withdraw some money. You don’t have a
cash account set up in your chart of accounts, so you will need to
- create one. Create the account as <guilabel>Cash</guilabel> as a
+ create one. Create the account as <guilabel>Cash</guilabel> as a
top-level account of type <guilabel>Asset</guilabel>. From your
<emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account register, enter an ATM type withdrawal to transfer
$100 from <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> to <emphasis>Cash</emphasis> on the 25 of March.</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-atm">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_atm.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Checking Account Register</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the Checking Account Register with an ATM
withdrawal.</para>
@@ -312,11 +312,11 @@
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="cbook-puttoget-reconcile">
<title>Opening Balances</title>
-
+
<para>Now we are ready to reconcile this <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account, using this
sample bank statement:</para>
@@ -326,17 +326,17 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_bankstmt.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>A sample Bank Statement</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows a sample Bank Statement.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
@@ -346,52 +346,52 @@
When you have checked off all your entries, the reconcile window
should look like this:
</para>
-
- <screenshot id="cbook-reconexamp">
+
+ <screenshot id="cbook-reconexamp">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_reconexamp.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The reconcile window</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
+ </textobject>
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the reconcile window with a $5
difference.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
<para>Notice that your reconciled balance differs from your ending
balance by $5.00. If you look at the sample bank statement, you will
see there is a $5.00 service charge that has not been added to your
<emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account.
</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>So click on the <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> register and add the $5.00 service
charge to your <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account. On a blank line of the <emphasis>Checking</emphasis>
register, enter a transaction to transfer $5.00 from <emphasis>Checking</emphasis> to a
<emphasis>Service Charges</emphasis> account. (You will need to create the <emphasis>Service Charges</emphasis>
- account as type <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>.) Use the transaction date printed on the
+ account as type <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>.) Use the transaction date printed on the
sample statement as the date you enter for this transaction. Your
<emphasis>Checking</emphasis> account should now look like this:</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-servch">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_servch.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Checking Account Register</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the Checking Account Register with
service charge added.</para>
@@ -409,14 +409,14 @@
should now show <guilabel>y</guilabel> for each transaction you just
reconciled. Also observe the bottom status row that now indicates
<guilabel>Reconciled: USD 1451.79</guilabel></para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-reconciledCheckAct">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_reconciledCheckAct.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_reconciledCheckAct.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>The Checking Account Register</phrase>
</textobject>
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
-
+
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
@@ -448,8 +448,8 @@
<textobject>
<phrase>The Chart of Accounts</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
+ </textobject>
+
<caption>
<para>This image shows the Chart of Accounts.</para>
</caption>
@@ -459,20 +459,20 @@
<sect2 id="cbook-puttoget-reports">
<title>Reports</title>
-
- <para>As we did in the previous chapter, let’s have a look at a
+
+ <para>As we did in the previous chapter, let’s have a look at a
<guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>, and a <guilabel>Transaction</guilabel> Report.
- </para>
+ </para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>First let’s have a look at the <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel> report
for the month of March.</para>
- <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
- <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
+ <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Cash Flow</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-puttoget2-Cash">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@
</textobject>
<caption>
- <para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after
+ <para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after
<xref linkend="chapter_cbook"></xref>.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -493,17 +493,17 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for the various
+ <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for the various
Asset accounts.
</para>
<para>Select the transaction report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Transaction Report</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-puttoget2-TransactionRptChecking">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_TransactionRptAssets.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_TransactionRptAssets.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
@@ -518,19 +518,19 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
</listitem>
-
-
+
+
<listitem>
<para>Now let’s change the transaction report to only show the various
<emphasis>Expenses</emphasis> account.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cbook-puttoget2-TransactionRptExpenses">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/cbook_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
@@ -545,11 +545,11 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
</listitem>
-
+
</orderedlist>
-
+
<para>Notice that you have not yet used one of the accounts listed in your
chart, the <guilabel>Credit Card</guilabel> account. Now that you know how
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_cc.xml b/guide/C/ch_cc.xml
index b685a43..30a5ca3 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_cc.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_cc.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@
built-in reconciliation application. Highlight the credit card account
and click on <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This reconciliation procedure is
- described in detail in the <xref linkend="txns-reconcile1"></xref>,
+ described in detail in the <xref linkend="txns-reconcile1"></xref>,
but we will step
through the process here as well. For this example, let’s assume that
the credit card statement is dated May 1st, with a final balance of
@@ -513,28 +513,28 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="cc-puttoget-save">
<title>Save file</title>
<para>Last, save the <application>&app;</application> data file (<filename>gcashdata_6</filename>).</para>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2 id="cc-puttoget-reports">
<title>Reports</title>
-
- <para>As we did in the previous chapters, let’s have a look at a
+
+ <para>As we did in the previous chapters, let’s have a look at a
<guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>, and a <guilabel>Transaction</guilabel> Report.
- </para>
+ </para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>First let’s have a look at the <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel> report
for the liability account <guilabel>Visa</guilabel> during the month of March.</para>
- <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
- <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
+ <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Cash Flow</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cc-puttoget2-Cash">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@
</textobject>
<caption>
- <para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after
+ <para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after
<xref linkend="chapter_cc"></xref>.</para>
</caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -555,17 +555,17 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for the Visa
+ <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for the Visa
account.
</para>
- <para>Select the transaction report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ <para>Select the transaction report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Transaction Report</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cc-puttoget2-TransactionRptVisa">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/cc_TransactionRptVisa.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/cc_TransactionRptVisa.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
@@ -580,19 +580,19 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
</listitem>
-
-
+
+
<listitem>
<para>Now let’s change the transaction report to only show the various
Expenses accounts.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="cc-puttoget2-TransactionRptExpenses">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/cc_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/cc_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
@@ -607,12 +607,12 @@
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
</listitem>
-
+
</orderedlist>
- </sect2>
-
-
+ </sect2>
+
+
</sect1>
</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_currency.xml b/guide/C/ch_currency.xml
index d3624e9..1d27765 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_currency.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_currency.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.4.0
Last modified: March 16th 2010
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@
do you transfer funds between accounts with different currencies? How do
you calculate the overall value when you have mixed currency accounts? How
do reports deal with mixed currencies?</para>
-
+
<note>
<para>An alternative way to manage multiple currency accounts from the one
- presented in the next sections, is to use the <guilabel>trading</guilabel> accounts
- capabilities of <application>&app;</application>. This feature, which has been
- introduced with <application>&app;</application> version 2.3.14, can be enabled by
+ presented in the next sections, is to use the <guilabel>trading</guilabel> accounts
+ capabilities of <application>&app;</application>. This feature, which has been
+ introduced with <application>&app;</application> version 2.3.14, can be enabled by
going to the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab under <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>
Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
<para>For a complete guide on <guilabel>trading</guilabel> accounts
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
<sect1 id="currency_acct1">
<title>Account Setup</title>
- <para>Your default account currency is set in the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> tab
+ <para>Your default account currency is set in the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> tab
under <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
(<menuchoice><guimenu>&app;</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X).
You should set this parameter correctly, as it will save you much time when building
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
-Equity (USD)
-Opening Balances
-USD (USD)
- -EUR (EUR)
+ -EUR (EUR)
-EUR (HKD)
Note: the currency of each account is shown in parenthesis.
@@ -332,9 +332,9 @@ Note: the currency of each account is shown in parenthesis.
automatically load the various exchange rates you need.</para>
<note><para>
- If the <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton> button is disabled,
- that means that the <application>Perl</application> module <application>Finance::Quote</application> is not installed.
- For information on how to install it, please see
+ If the <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton> button is disabled,
+ that means that the <application>Perl</application> module <application>Finance::Quote</application> is not installed.
+ For information on how to install it, please see
<xref linkend="invest-stockprice-auto2" ></xref>
</para></note>
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Note: the currency of each account is shown in parenthesis.
boat</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- <para>The Chart of Accounts now reflects that your bank account has been
+ <para>The Chart of Accounts now reflects that your bank account has been
reduced with the value of the boat (JMD 509,000), and that your Fixed Assets
boat account has been increased with the same amount. If you also have turned
on the CoA (Column Choice) "Total (USD)" you will see the corresponding
@@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ Note: the currency of each account is shown in parenthesis.
and should not be taken as any kind of stock purchase advice.
</para></note>
- <para>You need to find out what the stock ticker is for this
+ <para>You need to find out what the stock ticker is for this
stock. To do this, you do a bit of investigation on the Internet, and
in particular on <ulink
url="http://finance.yahoo.com/lookup"><citetitle>Yahoo! Finance - Ticker
@@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Note: the currency of each account is shown in parenthesis.
0694.HK at Yahoo</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>Since we wanted to be able to track all various income and expense amounts,
we come up with the following Account structure:</para>
@@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:HKD (HKD)
Expenses:Commissions:Boom.0694.HK (HKD)
Income:Investments:Dividend:Boom:0694.HK (HKD)
</literallayout>
-
+
<para>The Chart of Accounts looks like this after creating all the
needed accounts:</para>
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Buy Stocks
Exchange Rate</guilabel>. Enter the number of shares (16,500) as the
<guilabel>To Amount</guilabel>.
</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="currency_purchase_ToAmount.png">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Buy Stocks
<para>If you return to the Chart of Accounts, you will see the
purchased shares reflected in the stock account’s total.</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="currency_purchase_AfterStocks.png">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -711,7 +711,7 @@ Buy Stocks
</note>
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="currency_invest1">
@@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ Buy Stocks
<para>This time let’s start with a fresh and new <application>&app;</application> data file, so
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and edit
preferences (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice>,
- <menuchoice><guimenu>&app;</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X)
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>&app;</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> on Mac OS X)
to set Default Currency as AUD. Since you have
decided to be able to track as much detail of your income and expenses
as possible, the following account hierarchy could be used;</para>
@@ -993,15 +993,15 @@ Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account (AUD)
happened to be very rich. And so, now you are $500,000 AUD richer. That was not
all though; another item in the mail states that you won the lottery, and got $250,000
AUD for that. </para>
-
+
<para>To record these transaction we need the following accounts</para>
<literallayout>
Equity:Lottery (AUD)
-Equity:Inheritance (AUD)
+Equity:Inheritance (AUD)
</literallayout>
- <para>The transactions you enter into your
+ <para>The transactions you enter into your
<emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis>
should look like this.</para>
@@ -1056,11 +1056,11 @@ Equity:Inheritance (AUD)
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2>
<title>Purchase a house</title>
- <para>At last you can afford to pay off that house loan you had to take some years ago
+ <para>At last you can afford to pay off that house loan you had to take some years ago
(with a $50,000 deposit).</para>
<literallayout>
@@ -1113,10 +1113,10 @@ Equity:Opening Balance (AUD) $50,000
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>Liabilities:Loans:Mortgage</emphasis> account Transaction Ledger looks like
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Liabilities:Loans:Mortgage</emphasis> account Transaction Ledger looks like
this after the transactions have been entered</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="currency_PutTogether_AussieHouse.png">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
@@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ Expenses:Investments:Currency Transfer (AUD)
we first do a currency transaction to the various bank accounts
associated with the stock. </para>
- <para>The transaction you enter into your
+ <para>The transaction you enter into your
<emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Savings Account</emphasis>
should look like this.</para>
@@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ Expenses:Investments:Currency Transfer (AUD)
<entry></entry>
- <entry>0.7593</entry>
+ <entry>0.7593</entry>
<entry>25</entry>
</row>
@@ -1280,7 +1280,7 @@ Expenses:Investments:Currency Transfer (AUD)
</tgroup>
</table>
</para>
-
+
<para>As you can see in the Chart of Accounts, you have now purchased shares of stock in three
different currencies (HK, USD, as well as in SEK), but the Chart of Account (as seen below)
does not indicate how much they are valued in your home currency, AUD.</para>
@@ -1421,18 +1421,18 @@ Assets:Fixed Assets:NZ House (NZ)
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
-
-
+
+
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2>
<title>Whats next?</title>
- <para>As you have seen in the above examples you have only done the initial purchases.
- The rest, that is, various selling transactions and unrealized gains tracking is left for you to
+ <para>As you have seen in the above examples you have only done the initial purchases.
+ The rest, that is, various selling transactions and unrealized gains tracking is left for you to
ponder.</para>
</sect2>
-
-
+
+
</sect1>
-
+
</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_expenses.xml b/guide/C/ch_expenses.xml
index 4e171b3..98559f7 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_expenses.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_expenses.xml
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Version: 2.6.0
Last modified: September 12th 2016
modified: September 12th 2016
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
@@ -16,71 +16,71 @@
<chapter id="chapter_expenses">
<title>Expense Accounts</title>
- <para>If managing your checkbook is the first step in tracking your finances, then using expense accounts
- to see where you are expending money is a close second step. This chapter will give you an understanding of
- how <application>&app;</application> uses expense accounts to help you keep track of many different
+ <para>If managing your checkbook is the first step in tracking your finances, then using expense accounts
+ to see where you are expending money is a close second step. This chapter will give you an understanding of
+ how <application>&app;</application> uses expense accounts to help you keep track of many different
categories of transactions.</para>
-
+
<sect1 id="expenses-concepts">
<title>Concepts</title>
- <para>An expense type account is used to allow you to track how much you spend on specific
+ <para>An expense type account is used to allow you to track how much you spend on specific
expenses. Technically, expense accounts are not a part of traditional accounting,
but have become common with the increased capabilities of computer-based accounting systems.
- Many people's first experience with tracking expenses comes from Quicken(tm), where
- transactions can be assigned to one or more categories. In <application>&app;</application>, these categories
- are set up as separate accounts, which are designated as Expense type accounts.
- This allows <application>&app;</application> to apply the rules of double-entry accounting consistently.
- Expense accounts can be as detailed or as general as you need. Some users need only a few accounts for
- personal expense tracking. Others use <application>&app;</application> expense accounts to manage their expenses
- in great detail. The level of detail you choose is up to you. Keep in mind that with <application>&app;</application>,
- you can change accounts for transactions, so if your needs change later on, it is possible to move
+ Many people's first experience with tracking expenses comes from Quicken(tm), where
+ transactions can be assigned to one or more categories. In <application>&app;</application>, these categories
+ are set up as separate accounts, which are designated as Expense type accounts.
+ This allows <application>&app;</application> to apply the rules of double-entry accounting consistently.
+ Expense accounts can be as detailed or as general as you need. Some users need only a few accounts for
+ personal expense tracking. Others use <application>&app;</application> expense accounts to manage their expenses
+ in great detail. The level of detail you choose is up to you. Keep in mind that with <application>&app;</application>,
+ you can change accounts for transactions, so if your needs change later on, it is possible to move
transactions around.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="expenses-setup">
<title>Setting Up Accounts</title>
<sect2 id="expenses-su-simple">
<title>Simple Expense Account Setup</title>
- <para>For many users, the easiest way to set up expense accounts is to check the "Common Accounts"
- when you create a new Account Hierarchy. This will establish many of the most common expense accounts
+ <para>For many users, the easiest way to set up expense accounts is to check the "Common Accounts"
+ when you create a new Account Hierarchy. This will establish many of the most common expense accounts
that users need. See "New Account Hierarchy Setup" in Chapter 3 of the Help guide for more information.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="expenses-su-complex">
<title>Complex Expense Account Setup</title>
- <para>If you have different expense accounting needs, you can refer to <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>,
- or Chapter 5.4 in the Help manual for instructions on how to create accounts.</para>
- <para>Typical reasons for adding new or different expense accounts include: to track
- expenses for particular business purposes (e.g., specific types of supply expenses),
- to track expenses for particular tax purposes (e.g., tax expenses that must be reported
- to others), or simply to track expenses that are meaningful to you (e.g., payments made
+ <para>If you have different expense accounting needs, you can refer to <xref linkend="chapter_txns"></xref>,
+ or Chapter 5.4 in the Help manual for instructions on how to create accounts.</para>
+ <para>Typical reasons for adding new or different expense accounts include: to track
+ expenses for particular business purposes (e.g., specific types of supply expenses),
+ to track expenses for particular tax purposes (e.g., tax expenses that must be reported
+ to others), or simply to track expenses that are meaningful to you (e.g., payments made
to a particular charity).</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="expenses-entering">
<title>Entering Expense Transactions</title>
- <para>While it is possible to enter transactions directly into expense accounts, it is
- not normally how these are entered. For most people, transactions for an expense account
- are added when the user is entering data into the other account in the transaction.
- In other words, if you have an expense account for Charitable Donations (e.g., Expenses:Charity),
- you will typically add a transaction to the expense account by assigning a check in your
+ <para>While it is possible to enter transactions directly into expense accounts, it is
+ not normally how these are entered. For most people, transactions for an expense account
+ are added when the user is entering data into the other account in the transaction.
+ In other words, if you have an expense account for Charitable Donations (e.g., Expenses:Charity),
+ you will typically add a transaction to the expense account by assigning a check in your
checking account register to the Charity account.</para>
- <para>If you open an expense account, you will see a register similar to most others you find
+ <para>If you open an expense account, you will see a register similar to most others you find
in <application>&app;</application>. The informal column headings for the transaction amounts
- are slightly different, however. The left (debit) column will read <emphasis>Tot Expense</emphasis>, while
+ are slightly different, however. The left (debit) column will read <emphasis>Tot Expense</emphasis>, while
the right (credit) column will read <emphasis>Tot Rebate</emphasis>.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="expenses-other">
<title>Other Considerations for Expense Accounts</title>
- <para>Because expense accounts are generated entirely by you, there are no statements against
- which you would reconcile your data. Therefore, there is technically nothing to reconcile. You
- can, of course use the reconcile process for expense accounts, which will lock the transactions
+ <para>Because expense accounts are generated entirely by you, there are no statements against
+ which you would reconcile your data. Therefore, there is technically nothing to reconcile. You
+ can, of course use the reconcile process for expense accounts, which will lock the transactions
for future editing.</para>
- <para>One point to consider is that as your use of <application>&app;</application> continues, the
- balances in these accounts will grow, since there are usually very few credit transactions that
- reduce the balances. There is nothing wrong with this situation, but some users may wish to clear
- the balances in their expense accounts periodically. Zeroing transactions can be entered that
- transfer the balance of the account to an Equity account. <application>&app;</application> includes
- a Closing Books procedure that includes zeroing out expense accounts. Keep in mind that this is
- not necessary, and that if you need to gather information on a given expense account, you can
+ <para>One point to consider is that as your use of <application>&app;</application> continues, the
+ balances in these accounts will grow, since there are usually very few credit transactions that
+ reduce the balances. There is nothing wrong with this situation, but some users may wish to clear
+ the balances in their expense accounts periodically. Zeroing transactions can be entered that
+ transfer the balance of the account to an Equity account. <application>&app;</application> includes
+ a Closing Books procedure that includes zeroing out expense accounts. Keep in mind that this is
+ not necessary, and that if you need to gather information on a given expense account, you can
use various reports to extract that data without zeroing the account out.</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_import_business_data.xml b/guide/C/ch_import_business_data.xml
index 3732890..55ce87e 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_import_business_data.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_import_business_data.xml
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Author:
<chapter id="ch_import_bus_data">
<title>Importing Business Data</title>
-
+
<sect1 id="import-invoices">
<title>Import Bills or Invoices</title>
@@ -25,9 +25,9 @@ Author:
<para>On Linux systems this file is found at <filename>$HOME/.gnucash/config.user</filename>
and on Mac OSX it is <filename>~/Library/Application Support/Gnucash/config.user</filename>.
If the file doesn’t already exist you will have to create it.
- After restarting <application>&app;</application>, the item will appear at the bottom
+ After restarting <application>&app;</application>, the item will appear at the bottom
of the business menu.</para>
-
+
<para>In order for the importer to work the data must be in a fixed field
length, comma separated line format. A example <application>Python</application> script to convert
@@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ MEC-0071,,000013,,,,VAT,tax,Expenses:VAT,1,4.35,,,,no,,,,,,,
</para>
<para>Once you have converted the file navigate to <menuchoice><guimenu>Business</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Invoice & Bill Import</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open a new import window.
- Select the file you have just created, select <guilabel>Bill</guilabel>
+ <guimenuitem>Invoice & Bill Import</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to open a new import window.
+ Select the file you have just created, select <guilabel>Bill</guilabel>
or <guilabel>Invoice</guilabel> and <guilabel>Comma separated</guilabel> format. At this
point the data should show up in the preview window. Check that the field
data are in the correct columns before selecting <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Once imported the
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ MEC-0071,,000013,,,,VAT,tax,Expenses:VAT,1,4.35,,,,no,,,,,,,
<note>
<para>If <application>Python</application> (other languages are avaialble) is not your thing then
- post a request to <ulink url="https://lists.gnucash.org/mailman/listinfo/gnucash-user"><citetitle>&app; user list</citetitle></ulink>,
+ post a request to <ulink url="https://lists.gnucash.org/mailman/listinfo/gnucash-user"><citetitle>&app; user list</citetitle></ulink>,
with an example of your downloaded <acronym>CSV</acronym>, and someone may write you a <application>Python</application> script to do the
translation.
</para>
@@ -312,13 +312,13 @@ MEC-0071,,000013,,,,VAT,tax,Expenses:VAT,1,4.35,,,,no,,,,,,,
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="import-customers-vendors">
<title>Importing Customers and Vendors</title>
<para>This functionality is only available in the 2.6 versions of GnuCash and is only loaded by default for versions greater than 2.6.</para>
- <para>For versions lower than 2.6 the Customers and Vendors importer is an optional module and needs to
+ <para>For versions lower than 2.6 the Customers and Vendors importer is an optional module and needs to
enabled by editing the file <filename>$HOME/.gnucash/config.user</filename>,
adding the line:</para>
<para><code>(gnc:module-load "gnucash/plugins/customer_import" 0)
@@ -326,17 +326,17 @@ MEC-0071,,000013,,,,VAT,tax,Expenses:VAT,1,4.35,,,,no,,,,,,,
<para>On Linux systems this file is found at <filename>$HOME/.gnucash/config.user</filename>
and on Mac OSX it is <filename>~/Library/Application Support/Gnucash/config.user</filename>.
If the file doesn’t already exist you will have to create it.
- After restarting <application>&app;</application> the item will appear at the bottom
+ After restarting <application>&app;</application> the item will appear at the bottom
of the business menu.</para>
<para>In order for the importer to work each line in the input file must have the following structure.
</para>
<para><code>
id, company, name, addr1, addr2, addr3, addr4, phone, fax, email, notes, shipname, shipaddr1, shipaddr2, shipaddr3, shipaddr4, shiphone, shipfax, shipmail
</code> </para>
-
+
<para>
Fields can be separated with commas or semicolons and each field can be in quotes. These options are selectable in the import dialog. Vendors don’t have shipping information so even though the fields have to exist, leave them empty.
- The id field is optional and if it is empty a new id will be chosen. If the id field has a value this will UPDATE any vendor/customer with the same id. This may not be what you want. Note that in your input file the data must be a single line for each customer/vendor.
+ The id field is optional and if it is empty a new id will be chosen. If the id field has a value this will UPDATE any vendor/customer with the same id. This may not be what you want. Note that in your input file the data must be a single line for each customer/vendor.
</para>
<para>
The importer does not currently import billing information for customers or vendors, these will have to be edited individually after importing.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_invest.xml b/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
index f6f6969..493a869 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Last modified: December 7th 2009
modified: January 10th 2007
modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@
may would not receive this tax break on an expensive
painting.</para>
- <para>Fixed asset investments are discussed in <xref linkend="chapter_capgain" /> and
+ <para>Fixed asset investments are discussed in <xref linkend="chapter_capgain" /> and
<xref linkend="chapter_dep" />. Typically, there is not much to do
in terms of accounting for fixed asset investments except recording
the buying and selling transactions.</para>
@@ -379,7 +379,7 @@
</application> (the Price Database - <menuchoice><guimenu>Tools
</guimenu><guimenuitem>Price Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>). This
contains prices for individual securities (not security accounts). All
- prices for an individual security are in a single currency. If a
+ prices for an individual security are in a single currency. If a
security is traded in multiple currencies, then a separate security and
separate accounts should be set up of each currency.
</para>
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Income
bank statements which describe the activity of your account. In our
fictional example, we do nothing with the money at this bank, so the
only activity is income from interest and bank charges. The monthly bank
- charges are $2. After 6 months, the register window for the CD and for the savings
+ charges are $2. After 6 months, the register window for the CD and for the savings
account should look like these:</para>
<screenshot id="invest-int2">
@@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Income
the <guibutton>Select ...</guibutton> button next to the
<guilabel>security/currency</guilabel> line. We must change the
security from the default (your default currency) to this
- specific stock. This will bring up the
+ specific stock. This will bring up the
<guilabel>Select Security</guilabel> dialog.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -881,7 +881,7 @@ Income
<listitem>
<para><emphasis>Tax Related</emphasis> - Go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to check this box if this
+ <guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to check this box if this
account’s transactions will relate to Income Taxes.</para>
</listitem>
@@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ Income
the purchase (eg: Jan. 1 2005), a description (eg: Initial Purchase),
transfer from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis>, Shares (eg:
100), and Price (eg: $20). You do not need to fill in the
- <guilabel>Buy</guilabel> column, as it will be calculated for you. This example
+ <guilabel>Buy</guilabel> column, as it will be calculated for you. This example
assumed there was no commission on this transaction to simplify the example. Your
AMZN Commodity view should now appear like this:</para>
@@ -982,10 +982,10 @@ Income
<para>The only difference between setting up a new stock purchase
versus the setup for preexisting stocks as described in the previous
section is that instead of transferring the money used to purchase the
- stock from the <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis> account, you use your
+ stock from the <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis> account, you use your
<emphasis>Assets:Bank ABC</emphasis> account.</para>
- <para>Now you will purchase $5000 of IBM stock, with a commission of $100. First
+ <para>Now you will purchase $5000 of IBM stock, with a commission of $100. First
step will be to create the stock account for IBM. The existing <emphasis>Expenses:Commissions</emphasis>
account will be used. If you wish to track commissions to the individual stock
an additional sub-account would be necessary.</para>
@@ -994,7 +994,7 @@ Income
the purchase (eg: Jan. 3 2005), a description (eg: Initial IBM Purchase),
Shares will be skipped (to be calculated), Price (eg: $96.60), and Buy ($5000).
You do not need to fill in the <guilabel>Shares</guilabel> column, as it will be
- calculated for you. The next line in the split transaction will be
+ calculated for you. The next line in the split transaction will be
<emphasis>Expenses:Commissions</emphasis> and fill in Buy ($100).
The third line will be to transfer from <emphasis>Assets:Bank ABC:Savings</emphasis>,
$5100 to balance the transaction.
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ Income
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Security</guilabel></term>
+ <term><guilabel>Security</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>The name of the commodity,
must be chosen from the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> list</para>
@@ -1213,14 +1213,14 @@ Income
window and run a script for you which will ask lots of
questions. Accept the default for each unless you know what
you’re doing.</para>
-
- <para><emphasis role="strong">Linux:</emphasis>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="strong">Linux:</emphasis>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Close any running <application>&app;</application> instances.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Locate the folder where <application>&app;</application>
+ <para>Locate the folder where <application>&app;</application>
is installed by searching for <application>gnc-fq-update</application></para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -1261,7 +1261,7 @@ Income
that have already been setup, use the <menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Security Editor</guimenuitem>
</menuchoice>, to edit the
security and check the <guilabel>Get Online Quotes</guilabel> box. You will
- now be able to modify the radio buttons for <guilabel>Type of quote source</guilabel>, the pull-down menus
+ now be able to modify the radio buttons for <guilabel>Type of quote source</guilabel>, the pull-down menus
to specify the specific source(s) and <guilabel>The timezone for these
quotes</guilabel>. When finished editing, <guilabel>Close</guilabel> the Security Editor to return to
the <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> and click on the <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton>
@@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@ Income
<para>Most <application>&app;</application> Asset reports have options to set/modify a number of parameters for the report. The
Options windows is displayed by selecting the report tab then clicking on either the <guibutton>Options</guibutton>
- icon in the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> or selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+ icon in the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> or selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab in the
resulting window contains various parameters for the report. One of these is <quote>Price Source</quote> which of offers
three alternatives to determine stock prices in reports:</para>
@@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ Income
<title>Selling Shares</title>
<para>Entering an investment you are selling is done in the same way as
- buying one (see <xref linkend="invest-buy-new2" />) except the total cost
+ buying one (see <xref linkend="invest-buy-new2" />) except the total cost
of the transaction is entered in the
<emphasis>Sell</emphasis> column and the <emphasis>Shares</emphasis>
column is entered as a negative amount. The net proceeds from the sale
@@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ Income
<para>The proper recording of the stock sale *must* be done using a split
transaction. In the split transaction, you must account for the profit (or
- loss) as coming from an <emphasis>Income:Capital Gains</emphasis> account
+ loss) as coming from an <emphasis>Income:Capital Gains</emphasis> account
(or <emphasis>Expenses:Capital Loss</emphasis>). To balance this income,
you will need to enter the stock asset
twice in the split. Once to record the actual sale (using the correct
@@ -1423,8 +1423,8 @@ Income
<note>
<para>In order to get <application>&app;</application> to commit this
- zero-share, zero-price split to the transaction, you *must*
- <keycap>Tab</keycap> out of the split. If you use the
+ zero-share, zero-price split to the transaction, you *must*
+ <keycap>Tab</keycap> out of the split. If you use the
<keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, <application>&app;</application>
will convert the split into shares of the commodity.</para>
</note>
@@ -1765,7 +1765,7 @@ Income
</tgroup>
</table>
- <note>
+ <note>
<para>You may either enter the loss as a positive number in the
<quote>buy</quote> column or as a negative number in the <quote>sell</quote>
column, <application>&app;</application> will move the <quote>negative profit</quote>
@@ -1828,9 +1828,9 @@ Income
<title>Dividends in Cash</title>
<para>If the dividend is presented as cash, you should record the
- transaction in the asset account that received the money, as income
+ transaction in the asset account that received the money, as income
from <emphasis>Income:Dividends</emphasis>. Additionally if you want to tie
- the cash dividend to a particular stock holding then add a dummy
+ the cash dividend to a particular stock holding then add a dummy
transaction split to the stock account with quantity 0 price 1 value 0.</para>
<para>As an example consider the following; the dividends
@@ -1881,8 +1881,8 @@ Income
<para>Starting with the purchase of 100 shares on Jan. 3, 2005, all dividends will be
reinvested and an account is created to track the dividend to the specific stock. <application>&app;</application>
simplifies the entry by allowing calculations within the cells of the transaction. If the
- first dividend is $.29/share, enter $53.28 (purchase price + dividend) in the share <guilabel>Price</guilabel>
- cell and 100*.29 in the <guilabel>Buy</guilabel> cell. <application>&app;</application> will calculate for you the
+ first dividend is $.29/share, enter $53.28 (purchase price + dividend) in the share <guilabel>Price</guilabel>
+ cell and 100*.29 in the <guilabel>Buy</guilabel> cell. <application>&app;</application> will calculate for you the
corresponding numer of <guilabel>Shares</guilabel></para>
<screenshot id="invest-dividendreinvest1">
@@ -1908,34 +1908,34 @@ Income
</sect2>
</sect1>
-
- <sect1 id="invest-retofcap">
+
+ <sect1 id="invest-retofcap">
<title>Return of Capital</title>
-
+
<para>This refers to a transaction where an investment returns capital to
the investor and doesn't have any accounting implications other than
reducing the cost basis. The number of shares held is not changed.
</para>
-
+
<para>A Return of Capital transaction can be entered in the stock register
by entering the stock split with
</para>
-
+
<informaltable>
<tgroup cols="2">
<tbody>
<row>
<entry>Shares</entry><entry>0</entry>
</row>
-
+
<row>
<entry>Price</entry><entry>0</entry>
</row>
-
+
<row>
<entry>Sell</entry><entry>Return of Capital value</entry>
</row>
-
+
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</informaltable>
@@ -1995,7 +1995,7 @@ Income
<title>Simple Stock Split</title>
<para>As an example, our holding of NST stock declared a 2 for 1 stock split effective
- June 6, 2005. The process for entering this transaction is; select
+ June 6, 2005. The process for entering this transaction is; select
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Stock Split</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to start
the assistant.</para>
@@ -2069,7 +2069,7 @@ Income
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>Click on the <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
<screenshot id="invest-split3">
@@ -2209,7 +2209,7 @@ Income
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>Click on the <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
<screenshot id="invest-merge3">
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_loans.xml b/guide/C/ch_loans.xml
index 80a6728..ef8cd79 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_loans.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_loans.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Basic Loan Account Structure
<para><application>&app;</application> has a number of predefined loan account hierarchies
available, including Car Loans and Home Mortgage Loans. To access these
- predefined account structures, click on
+ predefined account structures, click on
<menuchoice>
<guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>New Account Hierarchy...</guimenuitem>
@@ -253,11 +253,11 @@ Basic Loan Account Structure
<para>To perform this calculation, leave <guilabel>Payment Periods</guilabel> empty, set
<guilabel>Interest Rate</guilabel> to <emphasis>10</emphasis>, <guilabel>Present Value</guilabel>
to <emphasis>20000</emphasis>, <guilabel>Periodic Payment</guilabel> is <emphasis>-500</emphasis>,
- and <guilabel>Future Value</guilabel> is <emphasis>0</emphasis> (you do not want to owe anything
- at the end of the loan). <guilabel>Compounding</guilabel> is <emphasis>Monthly</emphasis>,
- <guilabel>Payments</guilabel> are <emphasis>Monthly</emphasis>, assume <guilabel>End</guilabel>
+ and <guilabel>Future Value</guilabel> is <emphasis>0</emphasis> (you do not want to owe anything
+ at the end of the loan). <guilabel>Compounding</guilabel> is <emphasis>Monthly</emphasis>,
+ <guilabel>Payments</guilabel> are <emphasis>Monthly</emphasis>, assume <guilabel>End</guilabel>
of <guilabel>Period</guilabel> payments, and <guilabel>Discrete</guilabel> <guilabel>Compounding</guilabel>.
- Now, click on the <guibutton>Calculate</guibutton>. You should see 49 in the
+ Now, click on the <guibutton>Calculate</guibutton>. You should see 49 in the
<guilabel>Payment Periods</guilabel> field.</para>
<para>Answer: You will pay off the loan in 4 years and 1 month (49 months).</para>
@@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Continuous Interest: <emphasis>i = ln[(1+ieff)^PF]</emphasis>
<emphasis>PMT = -[FV + PV*(A + 1)]/[A*B]</emphasis>
<emphasis>FV = -[PV + A*(PV + C)] </emphasis>
-The solution for interest is broken into two cases.
+The solution for interest is broken into two cases.
The simple case for when PMT == 0 gives the solution:
<emphasis>i = [FV/PV]^(1/n) - 1</emphasis>
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ The simple case for when PMT == 0 gives the solution:
<sect3 id="loans_calcsdetails_ex2">
<title>Example: Monthly Payments</title>
- <para>Let’s recalculate <xref linkend="loans_calcsexample1_2"/>,
+ <para>Let’s recalculate <xref linkend="loans_calcsexample1_2"/>,
this time using the
mathematical formulas rather than the <guilabel>Loan Repayment Calculator</guilabel>. What is
your monthly payment on a $100000 30 year loan at a fixed rate of 4%
@@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ The simple case for when PMT == 0 gives the solution:
<literallayout>
-Asset
- -Bank
+ -Bank
-Bank Account
-Money owed to you
-Person
@@ -568,14 +568,14 @@ The simple case for when PMT == 0 gives the solution:
<para>So how do you calculate the Monthly Payment?</para>
- <para>You have a number of different options, like paper and pen,
+ <para>You have a number of different options, like paper and pen,
Linux Calculator, Open Office’s Calc module, but the easiest is to use
<application>&app;</application> <guilabel>Loan Repayment Calculator</guilabel>. This tells you that the Monthly Payment
should be $115.56.</para>
<para>But you need to know how much of this is Interest and how much is
- Principal to be able to do a proper bookkeeping. For this you need a
- more powerful tool, something like the <application>Calc</application> module in
+ Principal to be able to do a proper bookkeeping. For this you need a
+ more powerful tool, something like the <application>Calc</application> module in
<application>OpenOffice.org</application>, and
in particular the <acronym>PMT</acronym> function.</para>
@@ -852,8 +852,8 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
<sect1>
<title>Selling a house or a car (How-To)</title>
- <para>When you will record the selling of your house in <application>&app;</application> you have
- some different options. Here we will go through two of them, one in which
+ <para>When you will record the selling of your house in <application>&app;</application> you have
+ some different options. Here we will go through two of them, one in which
you only recorded the purchase amount, and now the selling amount. The other
where you have followed the ups and downs on the property market and registered
various Unrealized gains over the time.</para>
@@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
move this amount to your bank account. That means you are lacking
$300k. This amount you fetch from the <emphasis>Income:Captial Gains Long:House</emphasis>
account. The split transaction you enter into your
- <emphasis>bank</emphasis> account
+ <emphasis>bank</emphasis> account
(<emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Saving</emphasis>)
should look like this.</para>
@@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
remaining in your house account which needs to be removed. You move it
to our <emphasis>Income:Capital Gains Long:House</emphasis> account, which will indicate
a loss. The split transaction you enter into your
- <emphasis>house</emphasis> account
+ <emphasis>house</emphasis> account
(<emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:House</emphasis>) should look like this.</para>
<para><table>
@@ -994,15 +994,15 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
-
+
<sect2>
<title>A More Complex Transaction</title>
- <para>In this example, we will touch a little on some more complicated
+ <para>In this example, we will touch a little on some more complicated
accounting principles. For more details on this subject, please check
<xref linkend="chapter_capgain"></xref></para>
- <para>Here we will only touch on the case when you have accurately estimated
+ <para>Here we will only touch on the case when you have accurately estimated
the current value of your house. For the other cases (over-, and
under-estimated), please check <xref linkend="chapter_capgain"></xref>.</para>
@@ -1026,23 +1026,23 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
records with the estimated current value of your house. At the time
you want to sell it, you have determined that the current market
value is $600,000. </para>
-
- <para>The difference between $600,000 (estimated market value) and
+
+ <para>The difference between $600,000 (estimated market value) and
$300,000 (purchase value) is the current Unrealized Gain value. Therefore
- you have a total of $300,000 in your
+ you have a total of $300,000 in your
<emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:House:Unrealized Gain</emphasis> account</para>
-
+
<para>How do you record this sell transaction?</para>
<para>To record this you need to increase your bank account with the
$600k, and decrease some other accounts with $600k.
- You must first change from unrealized gain to realized gain
+ You must first change from unrealized gain to realized gain
for your <emphasis>Income</emphasis> accounts.
Lastly you need to transfer the full amounts from the <emphasis>Assets:Fixed Assets:House</emphasis>
sub-accounts.</para>
-
- <para>The transaction you enter into your
- <emphasis>Income:Realized Gain:House</emphasis> account
+
+ <para>The transaction you enter into your
+ <emphasis>Income:Realized Gain:House</emphasis> account
account should look like this.</para>
<para><table>
@@ -1077,9 +1077,9 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table></para>
-
- <para>The transaction you enter into your
- <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Saving</emphasis> account
+
+ <para>The transaction you enter into your
+ <emphasis>Assets:Current Assets:Saving</emphasis> account
should look like this.</para>
<para><table>
@@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
<entry>$300,000</entry>
</row>
-
+
<row>
<entry>Assets:Fixed Assets:House:Unrealized Gain</entry>
@@ -1122,14 +1122,14 @@ Equity:Opening Balances:USD
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table></para>
- <para>After having recorded these transactions you see that your House
- Asset have a value of 0, your Savings account have increased with $600,000,
+ <para>After having recorded these transactions you see that your House
+ Asset have a value of 0, your Savings account have increased with $600,000,
and lastly, the <emphasis>Income:Realized Gain</emphasis> have increased to $300,000.</para>
</sect2>
-
-
+
+
</sect1>
<!--
<sect1 id="loans_missing1">
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_oth_assets.xml b/guide/C/ch_oth_assets.xml
index 576dc69..692b5b0 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_oth_assets.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_oth_assets.xml
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Translators:
cash in your pocket or the account from which you drew the cash for
the payment made. If you paid by credit card, the debit side would be
the same as just described, but the credit would be an increase to the
- credit card company account on your books.</para>
+ credit card company account on your books.</para>
<para>When you received your reimbursement, then the journal entry (or
transaction) to record receipt of the funds from the employer would be:
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
index 42c04fb..72e85a7 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/oview_intro.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree"></imagedata>
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase><application>&app;</application> Chart of Accounts - Teaser</phrase>
</textobject>
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@
<para><emphasis>On-line exchange rates</emphasis>:
With <application>&app;</application>, you no longer need look up your exchange rates one at a
time. The process can be automated, to always present you with the
- account values converted to your preferred currency using the latest
+ account values converted to your preferred currency using the latest
exchange rates.</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@
sections to quickly scan procedures. These sections provide to-the-point
steps for accomplishing specific tasks. The <quote>Putting It All
Together</quote> sections present real-world examples in the form of a
- tutorial. Beginning with creation of a file in <xref linkend="chapter_basics"></xref>,
+ tutorial. Beginning with creation of a file in <xref linkend="chapter_basics"></xref>,
each successive chapter builds on the previous chapter’s tutorial.</para>
<para>This manual is organized into 3 main parts: <itemizedlist>
@@ -410,11 +410,11 @@
<listitem>
<para><xref linkend="ch_python_bindings"></xref></para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><xref linkend="ch_import_bus_data"></xref></para>
</listitem>
-
+
</itemizedlist></para>
<para>This manual also includes several appendices, which contains extra information
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_reports.xml b/guide/C/ch_reports.xml
index 0e08dc8..13cc417 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_reports.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_reports.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -12,67 +12,67 @@
-->
<chapter id="ch_reports">
<title>Reports</title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> is a powerful double entry accounting software package that allows
-users to enter and track their money in a reliable manner. However, putting
-this information into <application>&app;</application> is only a part of the process. To be truly
-helpful, you need to be able to extract this information in meaningful ways.
+ <para><application>&app;</application> is a powerful double entry accounting software package that allows
+users to enter and track their money in a reliable manner. However, putting
+this information into <application>&app;</application> is only a part of the process. To be truly
+helpful, you need to be able to extract this information in meaningful ways.
<application>&app;</application>'s reporting features allow you to just that.</para>
-<para><application>&app;</application>'s reporting features allow you to display nearly any group of
-transactions in a wide variety of formats. This makes it easy to answer
-questions about your finances, such as "How much did I spend on groceries
+<para><application>&app;</application>'s reporting features allow you to display nearly any group of
+transactions in a wide variety of formats. This makes it easy to answer
+questions about your finances, such as "How much did I spend on groceries
last month?" or "How much did I earn in the previous six months?"</para>
-<para><application>&app;</application> includes a number of common report types, which can be modified to
-meet your specific needs. If these common reports are insufficient, it is
-possible to modify or even write your own custom reports (although this is
+<para><application>&app;</application> includes a number of common report types, which can be modified to
+meet your specific needs. If these common reports are insufficient, it is
+possible to modify or even write your own custom reports (although this is
not recommended for beginners).</para>
<sect1 id="rpt_concepts">
<title>Overview</title>
- <para>There are many standard reports pre-built in <application>&app;</application>,
+ <para>There are many standard reports pre-built in <application>&app;</application>,
all available from the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> pulldown menu in the main account window.</para>
- <para>When you select a report from the list of reports, that report is first run
- with its default settings. Once you have opened the report, you can modify its parameters by clicking on
-the Options button on the toolbar. Under Options, you will see the different
-settings that you can change for each report. Note that for different reports,
+ <para>When you select a report from the list of reports, that report is first run
+ with its default settings. Once you have opened the report, you can modify its parameters by clicking on
+the Options button on the toolbar. Under Options, you will see the different
+settings that you can change for each report. Note that for different reports,
the options will be different. </para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="rpt_savedconfigsinfo">
<title>Saved Reports Configurations Concepts</title>
- <para>Once you have modified a report to meet your needs, you may wish to save
- that report for reuse at a later point. <application>&app;</application> allows custom
+ <para>Once you have modified a report to meet your needs, you may wish to save
+ that report for reuse at a later point. <application>&app;</application> allows custom
reports to be saved, using the Save Report Configuration command.</para>
<para>To save a report configuration:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Go to the Reports Menu and choose the desired report.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Change the settings on the report until it includes what is needed.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Go to the General tab of the report's options and change the Report Name
+<listitem><para>Go to the General tab of the report's options and change the Report Name
to something meaningful (Do not confuse this with the Report Title).</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Apply the changes and close the dialog.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Click the Save Report Configuration or Save Report Configuration As... button</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>This will store the report options in a file in your home directory.</para>
-<para>The first time you save a report with a name that has not already been saved,
-you can use either the Save Report Configuration or the Save Report
+<para>The first time you save a report with a name that has not already been saved,
+you can use either the Save Report Configuration or the Save Report
Configuration As... button. You can modify the report name before saving it.</para>
-<para>Once a report has been saved with the current name, the Save Report Configuration button will immediately update the saved report configuration.
-Use the Save Report Configuration As button to save the current report
+<para>Once a report has been saved with the current name, the Save Report Configuration button will immediately update the saved report configuration.
+Use the Save Report Configuration As button to save the current report
configuration with a new name.</para>
-<para>Saved report configurations are available for use under the
-Reports->Saved Report Configurations entry. They will also be available for
+<para>Saved report configurations are available for use under the
+Reports->Saved Report Configurations entry. They will also be available for
use on multicolumn reports.</para>
-<para>Saved report configurations can be deleted in the Saved Report Configurations
+<para>Saved report configurations can be deleted in the Saved Report Configurations
dialog by clicking the trashcan icon.</para>
-<para>To edit saved report configurations, open the report via Reports->Saved Report
-Configurations, edit and apply the new options, and click Save Report
-Configuration.</para>
+<para>To edit saved report configurations, open the report via Reports->Saved Report
+Configurations, edit and apply the new options, and click Save Report
+Configuration.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="rpt_standardrpts">
<title>Standard Reports Overview</title>
- <para>The standard reports that are included in <application>&app;</application> are presented here
- in the order that they appear in the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> menu. In each section, a short
- description for each report is given, which explains what the report is
+ <para>The standard reports that are included in <application>&app;</application> are presented here
+ in the order that they appear in the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> menu. In each section, a short
+ description for each report is given, which explains what the report is
intended to show, and its primary purpose.</para>
<sect2 id="rpt_grp_assetsliabs">
@@ -81,31 +81,31 @@ Configuration.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_advport">
<title>Advanced Portfolio</title>
-<para>The Advanced Portfolio produces a report on commodity accounts
-(stock and mutual fund type accounts) using price information stored in the
-<application>&app;</application> price database and within the
-<application>&app;</application> transaction data. If you do not have stock
-price information in your file, the report will indicate an error. This report
-includes extended information about commodity holdings, including information
+<para>The Advanced Portfolio produces a report on commodity accounts
+(stock and mutual fund type accounts) using price information stored in the
+<application>&app;</application> price database and within the
+<application>&app;</application> transaction data. If you do not have stock
+price information in your file, the report will indicate an error. This report
+includes extended information about commodity holdings, including information
about the basis, gain, and return of individual commodities.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_assetbarchart">
<title>Asset Barchart</title>
-<para>The Asset Barchart presents the value of assets on a monthly basis in
-barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
-have specific asset types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
+<para>The Asset Barchart presents the value of assets on a monthly basis in
+barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
+have specific asset types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
the current financial period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
-the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
-the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
+the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
+the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
form below the chart.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
@@ -114,16 +114,16 @@ affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para><
<title>Asset Piechart</title>
<para>The Asset Piechart presents the value of assets on a monthly basis in
piechart form. By default, the report shows the seven largest accounts, that
-have specific asset types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
+have specific asset types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
value as of the end of the current accounting period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
slices in the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
@@ -135,54 +135,54 @@ affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para><
<sect3 id="rpt_balancesheet">
<title>Balance Sheet</title>
-<para>The Balance Sheet lists Asset, Liability, and Equity account balances
-for all such accounts, and provides totals as of a given date. Balance sheets
-are commonly run for the last day of each fiscal year to give an overall sense
+<para>The Balance Sheet lists Asset, Liability, and Equity account balances
+for all such accounts, and provides totals as of a given date. Balance sheets
+are commonly run for the last day of each fiscal year to give an overall sense
of the financial condition of the entity.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_generaljournal">
<title>General Journal</title>
-<para>The General Journal produces a register of all transactions (beginning
-to end) in order by date, showing the accounts and the amounts involved, and
+<para>The General Journal produces a register of all transactions (beginning
+to end) in order by date, showing the accounts and the amounts involved, and
totals the Net Change by all currencies and assets.</para>
-<para>This report is not customizable by date or account, though you can
-include more or fewer details about the individual transactions, and whether
-to include running balances and totals for the credits and debits. If you
-need a report restricted to particular accounts, consider the Transaction
+<para>This report is not customizable by date or account, though you can
+include more or fewer details about the individual transactions, and whether
+to include running balances and totals for the credits and debits. If you
+need a report restricted to particular accounts, consider the Transaction
Report or open a particular account and choose the Account Transaction Report.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_generalledger">
<title>General Ledger</title>
-<para>The General Ledger produces information about all transactions
-for a selected set of accounts. When first run, this report loads no data,
+<para>The General Ledger produces information about all transactions
+for a selected set of accounts. When first run, this report loads no data,
and the report options must be changed to retrieve information from the file.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_investport">
<title>Investment Portfolio</title>
-<para>The Investment Portfolio produces a report of commodity accounts (that
-is, accounts with type "Stock" or "Mutual Fund"), giving holdings, price and
+<para>The Investment Portfolio produces a report of commodity accounts (that
+is, accounts with type "Stock" or "Mutual Fund"), giving holdings, price and
value information about commodities in the file.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_liabbarchart">
<title>Liability Barchart</title>
-<para>The Liability Barchart presents the value of liabilities on a monthly basis in
-barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
-have specific asset types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
+<para>The Liability Barchart presents the value of liabilities on a monthly basis in
+barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
+have specific asset types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
the current financial period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
-the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
-the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
+the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
+the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
form below the chart.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
@@ -191,51 +191,51 @@ affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para><
<title>Liability Piechart</title>
<para>The Liability Piechart presents the value of liabilities on a monthly basis in
piechart form. By default, the report shows the seven largest accounts, that
-have specific asset types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
+have specific asset types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
value as of the end of the current accounting period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
slices in the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_networthbar">
<title>Net Worth Barchart</title>
-<para>The Net Worth Barchart summarizes Asset accounts, Liability accounts, and
-overall Net Worth as bars on a graph on a monthly basis for the current
+<para>The Net Worth Barchart summarizes Asset accounts, Liability accounts, and
+overall Net Worth as bars on a graph on a monthly basis for the current
financial period. This report provides a graphic overview of the file over time.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_networthline">
<title>Net Worth Linechart</title>
-<para>The Net Worth Linechart summarizes Asset accounts, Liability accounts, and
-overall Net Worth as a line graph on a monthly basis for the current financial
+<para>The Net Worth Linechart summarizes Asset accounts, Liability accounts, and
+overall Net Worth as a line graph on a monthly basis for the current financial
period. This report provides a graphic overview of the file over time.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_pricescatter">
<title>Price Scatterplot</title>
-<para>The Price Scatterplot displays the value of one commodity relative to
-another commodity, for example the value of a stock relative to a currency.
-When first run, this report loads no data, and the report options must be
-changed to retrieve information from the file. Specifically, the "Price of
-Commodity" setting on the Price options tab must be changed to a specific
+<para>The Price Scatterplot displays the value of one commodity relative to
+another commodity, for example the value of a stock relative to a currency.
+When first run, this report loads no data, and the report options must be
+changed to retrieve information from the file. Specifically, the "Price of
+Commodity" setting on the Price options tab must be changed to a specific
commodity.</para>
</sect3>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="rpt_grp_budget">
<title>Budget Group</title>
-<para> Budget reports in <application>&app;</application> allow you to gather
-summary information related to budgets you may have created. In order for
-these reports to work, you must first create a budget. The reports in this
-group are specifically based on budget information. To use these reports, you
+<para> Budget reports in <application>&app;</application> allow you to gather
+summary information related to budgets you may have created. In order for
+these reports to work, you must first create a budget. The reports in this
+group are specifically based on budget information. To use these reports, you
need to have a budget saved in your file.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_budbalsht">
@@ -281,34 +281,34 @@ to a business.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_custsummary">
<title>Customer Summary</title>
-<para>Customer Summary is a customer profit report that can help with job analysis by
+<para>Customer Summary is a customer profit report that can help with job analysis by
comparing the income and expenses for a specific customer.</para>
-<para>All invoices have an Owner in <application>&app;</application>, so invoices that are
-made will show a customer and show in the report. When creating a Bill, the Default
-Chargeback Customer is blank. To use the profit report, this field needs an entry,
-since this is the tag that decides the line to which
+<para>All invoices have an Owner in <application>&app;</application>, so invoices that are
+made will show a customer and show in the report. When creating a Bill, the Default
+Chargeback Customer is blank. To use the profit report, this field needs an entry,
+since this is the tag that decides the line to which
to attach the expense. Left blank, the bill will be assigned to "No Customer."
-Similarly, when income is entered directly in a register rather than creating an
+Similarly, when income is entered directly in a register rather than creating an
invoice, it will also be assigned to "No Customer."</para>
-<para>Thus, if this report includes an entry for "No Customer", this means that the report
+<para>Thus, if this report includes an entry for "No Customer", this means that the report
may be inaccurate, as the results are not all properly labeled.</para>
<para>Possible use scenarios include:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Tracking retail sales from different cities</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Tracking rental properties</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Tracking types of business</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>Tracking commission sales</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Tracking rental properties</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Tracking types of business</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Tracking commission sales</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>Each of these scenarios assumes that the account structure includes breakdowns
-for individual tracked categories. Changing settings on the Income and Expense
-tabs under Options can hone the information displayed. By default all income and
-expense accounts are included; however, since <application>&app;</application> can't really predict
+for individual tracked categories. Changing settings on the Income and Expense
+tabs under Options can hone the information displayed. By default all income and
+expense accounts are included; however, since <application>&app;</application> can't really predict
the names and classification of income and expense accounts, it must group them all
into the "No Customer" entry.</para>
<para>Note that inventory-based businesses won't benefit from this report because of its nature.</para>
<para>Useful options:</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>The Expense Accounts tab allows the selection of one or more expense accounts.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The Expense Accounts tab allows the selection of one or more expense accounts.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The Income Accounts tab allows the selection of one or more income accounts.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The Display tab allows sorting by name, profit percentage, or amount of profit.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
@@ -341,9 +341,9 @@ into the "No Customer" entry.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_recaging">
<title>Receivable Aging</title>
-<para>This report provides a listing of all customers, their current balance, and
-how much they have outstanding from invoices over different time periods—how
-much they owe from 0-30 days, from 31-60 days, from 61-90 days, and over 90 days.
+<para>This report provides a listing of all customers, their current balance, and
+how much they have outstanding from invoices over different time periods—how
+much they owe from 0-30 days, from 31-60 days, from 61-90 days, and over 90 days.
The report also contains links to each customer and to their current customer report.</para>
</sect3>
@@ -359,39 +359,39 @@ The report also contains links to each customer and to their current customer re
<sect3 id="rpt_cashflow">
<title>Cash Flow</title>
-<para>This report shows the change in value for a set of accounts (the flow of cash)
+<para>This report shows the change in value for a set of accounts (the flow of cash)
over a given period of time. By default, this report is based on accounts in Assets and
-Special Accounts, and covers the current financial period. The report enumerates
-all money coming in to and going out of the base accounts, broken down by the
+Special Accounts, and covers the current financial period. The report enumerates
+all money coming in to and going out of the base accounts, broken down by the
other account.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_equity">
<title>Equity Statement</title>
-<para>This report can be seen as extension of the Balance Sheet report. The
-Balance Sheet states the balance of Assets, Liabilities and Equity at a
-specific point of time. The Equity Statement focuses on the Equity Accounts
+<para>This report can be seen as extension of the Balance Sheet report. The
+Balance Sheet states the balance of Assets, Liabilities and Equity at a
+specific point of time. The Equity Statement focuses on the Equity Accounts
by showing the cash flow to and from them for a given period of time.</para>
-<para>By balancing this cash flow with income, the report shows the available
+<para>By balancing this cash flow with income, the report shows the available
capital at the beginning and end of the selected time period.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_expbarchart">
<title>Expense Barchart</title>
-<para>The Expense Barchart presents the value of expenses on a monthly basis in
-barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
-have specific expense types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
+<para>The Expense Barchart presents the value of expenses on a monthly basis in
+barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
+have specific expense types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
the current financial period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
-the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
-the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
+the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
+the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
form below the chart.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
@@ -400,48 +400,48 @@ affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para><
<title>Expense Piechart</title>
<para>The Expense Piechart presents the value of expenses on a monthly basis in
piechart form. By default, the report shows the seven largest accounts, that
-have specific expense types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
+have specific expense types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
value as of the end of the current accounting period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
slices in the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_expdayoweek">
<title>Expenses vs. Day of Week</title>
-<para>Expenses vs. Day of Week presents a pie chart showing the totals for
-selected expense accounts totaled by the day of the week of the transaction.
-The report options enable you to make some adjustments (such as accounts,
-display options, and the date range) but the account selector only allows
-expense accounts to be chosen. The report aggregates expense transactions by
-day of week, not by any other period or category. Due to these limitations,
-the report may be considered a demonstration or an example to someone wanting
+<para>Expenses vs. Day of Week presents a pie chart showing the totals for
+selected expense accounts totaled by the day of the week of the transaction.
+The report options enable you to make some adjustments (such as accounts,
+display options, and the date range) but the account selector only allows
+expense accounts to be chosen. The report aggregates expense transactions by
+day of week, not by any other period or category. Due to these limitations,
+the report may be considered a demonstration or an example to someone wanting
to examine the source code for composing a useful custom report.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_incomebarchart">
<title>Income Barchart</title>
-<para>The Income Barchart presents the value of income on a monthly basis in
-barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
-have specific income types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
+<para>The Income Barchart presents the value of income on a monthly basis in
+barchart form. By default, the report displays the eight largest accounts that
+have specific income types assigned to them, and it displays bars for
the current financial period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
-the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
-the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Bars" option will display more bars in
+the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display. Additionally,
+the "Show table" option enables the display of chart information in tabular
form below the chart.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
@@ -455,63 +455,63 @@ affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para><
<title>Income Piechart</title>
<para>The Income Piechart presents the value of income on a monthly basis in
piechart form. By default, the report shows the seven largest accounts, that
-have specific income types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
+have specific income types assigned to them, arranged in descending order by
value as of the end of the current accounting period.</para>
<para>Several settings on this report can greatly affect the information included.</para>
<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
-the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
+<listitem><para>On the Accounts tab, the "Show Accounts until level" option changes how
+the report aggregates account totals. Change this value to see information at
deeper levels of the account structure.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
+<listitem><para>On the Display tab, the "Maximum Slices" option will display more
slices in the chart, allowing information for more accounts to display.</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
+<listitem><para>On the General tab, the "Price Source" option can significantly
affect the reported value of various commodities included in the report.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_incstatement">
<title>Income Statement</title>
-<para>This report lists Income and Expense account totals for a set period. By
-default, it shows all Expense and Income accounts down to 3 levels of
+<para>This report lists Income and Expense account totals for a set period. By
+default, it shows all Expense and Income accounts down to 3 levels of
sub-accounts for the current financial period.</para>
<para>An Income Statement is also called a "Profit and Loss" report or "Revenue Statement."</para>
-<para>In earlier versions of <application>&app;</application>, this report was called
-"Profit & Loss," but with version 2, the report was renamed "Income Statement"
+<para>In earlier versions of <application>&app;</application>, this report was called
+"Profit & Loss," but with version 2, the report was renamed "Income Statement"
to use more common accounting terminology.</para>
-<para>The Income Statement helps show where money is coming from and where it is
+<para>The Income Statement helps show where money is coming from and where it is
going for a given time period.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_incdayoweek">
<title>Income vs. Day of Week</title>
-<para>Income vs. Day of Week presents a piechart showing the totals for selected
-income accounts totaled by the day of the week of the transaction. The report
-options enable you to make some adjustments (such as accounts, display options,
-and the date range) but the account selector only allows income accounts to be
-chosen. The report aggregates income transactions by day of week, not by any
-other period or category. Due to these limitations, the report may be
-considered a demonstration or an example to someone wanting to examine the
+<para>Income vs. Day of Week presents a piechart showing the totals for selected
+income accounts totaled by the day of the week of the transaction. The report
+options enable you to make some adjustments (such as accounts, display options,
+and the date range) but the account selector only allows income accounts to be
+chosen. The report aggregates income transactions by day of week, not by any
+other period or category. Due to these limitations, the report may be
+considered a demonstration or an example to someone wanting to examine the
source code for composing a useful custom report.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_trialbal">
<title>Trial Balance</title>
<para>Trial Balance lists the ending balances in all accounts as of a particular
-date. It is typically run at the end of an accounting period and is primarily
+date. It is typically run at the end of an accounting period and is primarily
used to ensure that the total of all debits equals the total of all credits.</para>
</sect3>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="rpt_grp_sampcust">
<title>Sample & Custom Group</title>
-<para>The reports in this group offer examples on how reports can be customized
+<para>The reports in this group offer examples on how reports can be customized
or podified to suit personal need.</para>
-
+
<sect3 id="rpt_custommulti">
<title>Custom Multicolumn Report</title>
-<para>This report provides a base that allows several standard and custom
-reports to be combined into one view. Note that this report opens with an empty
-window; you must open the options and designate which reports to include for display.
-Once the reports have been selected, the settings for individual reports in the
+<para>This report provides a base that allows several standard and custom
+reports to be combined into one view. Note that this report opens with an empty
+window; you must open the options and designate which reports to include for display.
+Once the reports have been selected, the settings for individual reports in the
multicolumn display can be edited.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_sample">
@@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ multicolumn display can be edited.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_welcome">
<title>Welcome Sample Report</title>
-<para>This report demonstrates how the Multicolumn Report can be use to create
+<para>This report demonstrates how the Multicolumn Report can be use to create
custom dashboard-type reports.</para>
</sect3>
</sect2>
@@ -533,13 +533,13 @@ below.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_acctsummary">
<title>Account Summary</title>
-<para>This lists the balances of all accounts and subaccounts as of a
-particular date. By default, this report shows accounts and totals
+<para>This lists the balances of all accounts and subaccounts as of a
+particular date. By default, this report shows accounts and totals
down to third-level subaccounts.</para>
-<para>This report gives effectively the same information as the Chart of Accounts.
+<para>This report gives effectively the same information as the Chart of Accounts.
You can use this report to export and print the Chart of Accounts.</para>
-<para>Note: To generate a report of account totals over a particular time period
-(especially if you do not close your books at regular intervals), you might
+<para>Note: To generate a report of account totals over a particular time period
+(especially if you do not close your books at regular intervals), you might
consider using the Income Statement, or Cash Flow reports.</para>
</sect3>
@@ -550,26 +550,26 @@ consider using the Income Statement, or Cash Flow reports.</para>
<sect3 id="rpt_taxtxf">
<title>Tax Report & TXF Export</title>
-<para>Generates a report and a downloadable .txf file of taxable income and
-deductible expenses for a particular accounting period. To download the report
-data, choose the Export button on the toolbar and choose between html and .txf
+<para>Generates a report and a downloadable .txf file of taxable income and
+deductible expenses for a particular accounting period. To download the report
+data, choose the Export button on the toolbar and choose between html and .txf
downloadable versions.</para>
-<para>To use this report, you must use Edit --> Tax Options to identify which
-form the taxing authority uses for each income or expense account. Note that
+<para>To use this report, you must use Edit --> Tax Options to identify which
+form the taxing authority uses for each income or expense account. Note that
you can see but not modify the "Tax related" checkbox in Edit --> Edit Account.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_txnrept">
<title>Transaction Report</title>
-<para>This report lists the transactions in selected accounts during a
-specified financial period. When first run, this report loads no data,
+<para>This report lists the transactions in selected accounts during a
+specified financial period. When first run, this report loads no data,
and the report options must be changed to retrieve information from the file.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_savedrpts">
<title>Saved Report Configurations</title>
-<para>Selecting this will open a dialog with a list of available Saved Report
-Configurations. "Saved Report Configurations" means sets of customized
+<para>Selecting this will open a dialog with a list of available Saved Report
+Configurations. "Saved Report Configurations" means sets of customized
settings for standard reports.</para>
<para>These sets must be saved by the user before they appear here. See
Report Concepts above for instructions on how to save report configurations.</para>
@@ -577,19 +577,19 @@ Report Concepts above for instructions on how to save report configurations.</pa
<sect3 id="rpt_acctreport">
<title>Account Report</title>
-<para>The Account Report menu entry only appears when an account register is
-the active tab. This report produces a list of all transactions in the open
+<para>The Account Report menu entry only appears when an account register is
+the active tab. This report produces a list of all transactions in the open
register.</para>
<para>Note that if you conduct a search that retrieves several transactions, the
results are displayed in a new search register, which can then be used to create
-a report for just those transactions.</para>
+a report for just those transactions.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="rpt_accttxnrept">
<title>Account Transaction Report</title>
<para>This report also only appears when an account register is the active tab.
-However, this report only lists transactions that have been selected
-(e.g. by mouse click) in the current register. If no transactions are selected,
+However, this report only lists transactions that have been selected
+(e.g. by mouse click) in the current register. If no transactions are selected,
an empty report will be generated.</para>
</sect3>
</sect2>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
index f7b483e..1c01232 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 2.0.0
Last modified: 2014-09-26 (fell)
- Maintainers:
+ Maintainers:
Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
Author:
Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
@@ -58,14 +58,14 @@
<para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the <application>&app;</application> window, which allows you to view or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar. <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
<sect2 id="txns-registers-features2">
<title>Features of the Account Register</title>
-
+
<para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
-
+
<para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="txns-regstyle1">
<title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
default style is <guilabel>Basic Ledger</guilabel> mode, which displays
only the summary of splits affecting the current account. This is the
@@ -79,36 +79,36 @@
<listitem><para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
double-line format. Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
-
+
<para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.
</para>
<para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered on a separate split.</para>
<para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
-
+
<para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit4.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>3 Jeans purchases</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption><para>
This image shows one split transaction with 3 Jeans purchases
</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
<para>Now, let's open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
<screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
@@ -117,11 +117,11 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit5.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account
in Basic Ledger mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -129,28 +129,28 @@
<para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount, $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single split from the original transaction.</para>
<para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit6.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account in
Transaction Journal mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
-
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="txns-shortcuts1">
<title>Using Entry Shortcuts</title>
-
+
<para><application>&app;</application> provides several time-saving shortcuts for entering your
data. When you type the first few characters of a description that you
have used before, the QuickFill feature automatically fills in the rest of
@@ -170,46 +170,46 @@
<guilabel>Character</guilabel></menuchoice>.</para></tip>
<para>Register keyboard shortcuts also save you time, and <application>&app;</application> provides
several of them. In the date field, you can type:</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><keycap>+</keycap> or <keycap>=</keycap> to increment the date
and <keycap>-</keycap> or <keycap>_</keycap> to decrement the
date</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>]</keycap> or <keycap>}</keycap> to increment the month
and <keycap>[</keycap> or <keycap>{</keycap> to decrement the
month</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>M</keycap> or <keycap>m</keycap> to enter the first date
of the month</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>H</keycap> or <keycap>h</keycap> to enter the last date
of the month</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>Y</keycap> or <keycap>y</keycap> to enter the first date
of the year</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>R</keycap> or <keycap>r</keycap> to enter the last date
of the year</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>T</keycap> or <keycap>t</keycap> to enter today’s
date</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<tip><para>These date shortcuts not only work in the account register but everywhere
you can enter a date.</para></tip>
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@
<guilabel>Action</guilabel> field also supports QuickFill - if you type
the first characters of a common action (such as
<guilabel>Deposit</guilabel>), <application>&app;</application> will fill in the rest.</para>
-
+
<para>The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field supports QuickFill
of account names. You can start typing an account name and
<application>&app;</application> will fill in the remaining part of the name. Typing the
@@ -242,70 +242,70 @@
<emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account. You can also type the
<keycap>Menu</keycap> or <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Down</keycap></keycombo> keys in this
field to pop up a list of all account names.</para>
-
+
<para>In any of the amount fields, you can use a built-in calculator.
Simply type in the first value, followed by <keycap>+</keycap>,
<keycap>-</keycap>, <keycap>*</keycap>, or <keycap>/</keycap>, then type
in the second value. <application>&app;</application> will perform the calculation and return the
resulting value to the amount field when you press the
<keycap>Tab</keycap> key.</para>
-
+
<para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
[underlined character] to bring up the menu, then select an item by typing
its underlined character. For example, typing <keycombo>
<keycap>Alt</keycap>
-
+
<keycap>A</keycap>
</keycombo> brings up the Actions menu, then typing
<keycap>P</keycap> will split the transaction. A few of the menu items
also have shortcut keys that immediately invoke the command (typically
using the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key). These shortcuts are listed next
to the item.</para>
-
+
<para>To move around the register, use these keys to save time:</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to the next field, <keycombo>
<keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
+
<keycap>Tab</keycap>
</keycombo> to move to the previous field</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>Home</keycap> to move to the beginning of the field,
<keycap>End</keycap> to move to the end of the field</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> or <keycap>↓</keycap> to move to the next
transaction, <keycap>↑</keycap> to move to the previous
transaction</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>Page Up</keycap> to move up one screen, <keycap>Page
Down</keycap> to move down one screen</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycombo>
<keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
+
<keycap>Page Up</keycap>
</keycombo> to go to the first transaction, <keycombo>
<keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
+
<keycap>Page Down</keycap>
</keycombo> to go to the last transaction</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>In the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window you can use these
keyboard shortcuts:</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
@@ -313,12 +313,12 @@
moves to the previous
box</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para>Space bar toggles the status between reconciled and not
reconciled</para>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<para><keycap>↑</keycap> and <keycap>↓</keycap> navigate through the
entries within the current box</para>
@@ -328,12 +328,12 @@
</sect1>
<sect1 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
<title>Simple vs. Split Transactions</title>
-
+
<para>Every transaction in <application>&app;</application> has at least two splits, but a transaction can have more than two splits. A transaction with only two splits is called a <emphasis>simple transaction</emphasis>, since it only involves the current account and a single remote account. A transaction with three or more accounts is called a <emphasis>split transaction</emphasis>.</para>
<para>When the register is in Basic view, you will see a summary of the splits affecting the current account. For a simple transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display the other account from which money is <emphasis>transferred</emphasis>. For a split transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display <guilabel>-- Split Transaction --</guilabel>. You can see the individual splits of each
transaction by clicking the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button in the
<emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> while selecting the appropriate transaction.</para>
-
+
<para>For split transactions, the first line of the transaction is the
<emphasis>transaction line</emphasis>. It contains a
<guilabel>Date</guilabel>, optional <guilabel>Num</guilabel> (such as a
@@ -347,11 +347,11 @@
information, you need to look at the individual splits that make up the
transaction.</para>
<note>
- <para>Note: An account register displays a transaction when that
- transaction has a split assigned to the account. If a given transaction
- has more than one split assigned to a single account, then in Basic and
- Auto-Split view modes that transaction will appear in the register one
- time for each split assigned to that account. In Transaction Journal
+ <para>Note: An account register displays a transaction when that
+ transaction has a split assigned to the account. If a given transaction
+ has more than one split assigned to a single account, then in Basic and
+ Auto-Split view modes that transaction will appear in the register one
+ time for each split assigned to that account. In Transaction Journal
mode, such a transaction will only appear once in the register.</para>
</note>
@@ -366,11 +366,11 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit2.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>How split headings change</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption><para>This image shows how split headings
change.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -409,11 +409,11 @@
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit3.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
+
<textobject>
<phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account</phrase>
</textobject>
-
+
<caption><para>This image shows a jump to the
<emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@
<para>To add the paycheck split transaction from the<emphasis role="italic"> Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register window, click on a new transaction line and click <guilabel>Split</guilabel>. Note that if you have set your register view to Auto-Split or Transaction Journal, the splits will be opened for you. Enter the description of this transaction on the first line(e.g. “Employers R Usâ€). In the split lines below this, enter the various splits that make up this transaction, one by one. To enter the splits, first choose the account, then enter the amount by which to change the account. Keep in mind that when in an asset account register, amounts entered in the left column increase the account balance, while amounts entered in the right column decrease the balance (for more about this, see <xref linkend="basics-transactions2"/>). Tab or click the next split line and repeat the process. Note that if you are using the keyboard to navigate the transaction, use<keycap> Tab</keycap> to move from field to field, as using <keycap>Enter</keycap> will commit the transaction and create splits to an Imbalance account.</para>
<note>
<para>When creating a transaction in <application>&app;</application>, splits can be entered in any order.
- However, when the transaction is closed (either when leaving the transaction, or when
+ However, when the transaction is closed (either when leaving the transaction, or when
pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key), all debit splits will jump ahead of all credit splits.</para>
</note>
@@ -559,11 +559,11 @@
been cleared, but not reconciled. A split marked cleared signifies that you got some kind of confirmation
that the institution accepted the order (e.g. you have the restaurant's receipt for your credit card purchase).
You can toggle the reconciliation status
- between <emphasis>n</emphasis> and <emphasis>c</emphasis> by clicking in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field; you can set
+ between <emphasis>n</emphasis> and <emphasis>c</emphasis> by clicking in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field; you can set
it to <emphasis>y</emphasis> by using <xref linkend="txns-reconcile-window2" />.</para>
-
+
<para>At the bottom of the account window, there are (among others) two running
- balances (the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance), and the
+ balances (the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance), and the
<guilabel>total</guilabel> balance. The former balances should correspond to how much money
the bank thinks you have in your account, while the latter includes outstanding transactions.</para>
@@ -577,11 +577,11 @@
change to include this amount. When the bank statement arrives, you can
then compare it to what you’ve recorded in <application>&app;</application> by opening the reconciliation
window. There, you will be able to change the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to <emphasis>y</emphasis> (reconciled).</para>
-
+
<note>
<para>You cannot reconcile directly in a register window by clicking in the <emphasis>R</emphasis> field. You must use the
reconciliation window. Once a transaction has been marked <emphasis>reconciled</emphasis>,
- it can no longer be easily changed without breaking the
+ it can no longer be easily changed without breaking the
<link linkend="rec-start-blnc"><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></link> of the next reconciliation.</para>
</note>
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@
reconciliation. It should match the starting balance in your statement.</para>
<warning><para>Sometimes, the opening balance in <application>&app;</application> does not match
- that found on your statement. This can happen the first time you reconcile your account or
+ that found on your statement. This can happen the first time you reconcile your account or
when a previously-reconciled transaction is de-reconciled or deleted.</para></warning>
<note><para>The first time you reconcile your account, the <guilabel>starting balance</guilabel>
@@ -671,8 +671,8 @@
<listitem>
<para>This field should be filled with the ending balance as it appears in the statement.</para>
<note>
- <para><application>&app;</application> automatically fills this field with the
- <guilabel>Present</guilabel> balance as shown in the lower part of the
+ <para><application>&app;</application> automatically fills this field with the
+ <guilabel>Present</guilabel> balance as shown in the lower part of the
account’s register.</para>
</note>
</listitem>
@@ -690,14 +690,14 @@
<para>Clicking this button opens a new window that allow you to enter an interest transaction to the account to be
reconciled.</para>
<tip>
- <para>The <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window might be opened automatically when you start a reconciliation
- for an account of the type <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>, <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>,
+ <para>The <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window might be opened automatically when you start a reconciliation
+ for an account of the type <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>, <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>,
<emphasis>Mutual</emphasis>, <emphasis>Asset</emphasis>, <emphasis>Receivable</emphasis>,
<emphasis>Payable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Liability</emphasis>. If you want to disable
- this behavior for any of the previous accounts, go to the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> tab of the
+ this behavior for any of the previous accounts, go to the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> tab of the
<guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> and uncheck the <guilabel>Automatic interest transfer</guilabel>
- option. Alternatively, to disable this behavior only for the selected account, press the
- <guibutton>No Auto Interest Payments for this Account</guibutton> button in the
+ option. Alternatively, to disable this behavior only for the selected account, press the
+ <guibutton>No Auto Interest Payments for this Account</guibutton> button in the
<guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window.</para>
</tip>
</listitem>
@@ -728,15 +728,15 @@
</screenshot>
<para>The two panes called <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel>, lists all the unreconciled transactions that belongs to the account
+ <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel>, lists all the unreconciled transactions that belongs to the account
that is going to be reconciled.
The <guilabel>R</guilabel> columns show whether the transactions have been reconciled.</para>
-
+
<para>Now, examine each item on the bank statement, and look for the
matching item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.</para>
- <para>If you cannot find a transaction, then perhaps you forgot to enter it, or did not know that the transaction
- had happened. You can use the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
+ <para>If you cannot find a transaction, then perhaps you forgot to enter it, or did not know that the transaction
+ had happened. You can use the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
<menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
menu item in the menu, to open a register window and enter the missing
transaction. The new item will appear in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window when you
@@ -750,12 +750,12 @@
item, to open a register window and correct the transaction.</para>
<para>If the amounts agree, click on the item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.
- A check mark wil appear in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column aside the selected transaction.
+ A check mark wil appear in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column aside the selected transaction.
<application>&app;</application> will automatically update the amounts in the lower right summary pane.</para>
-
+
<tip>
<para>You can use the <keycap>up</keycap>/<keycap>down</keycap> arrow keys to scroll to the item, the
- <keycap>space</keycap> key to mark the item as reconciled and the <keycap>Tab</keycap>
+ <keycap>space</keycap> key to mark the item as reconciled and the <keycap>Tab</keycap>
key to switch panes.</para>
</tip>
@@ -768,12 +768,12 @@
other value, then either you have missed transactions, or some amounts
may be incorrect in <application>&app;</application>. (Or, less likely, the bank may have made an
error.)</para>
-
+
<note><para>Under some circumstances, it may be difficult or impossible to determine why an account will not reconcile. If you are unable to correct the discrepancy between your books and a statement, <application>&app;</application> includes a <guibutton>Balance</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> that will automatically create a balancing entry for you in the amount that cannot be reconciled.</para>
<para>To use this, carry out the full reconciliation (marking all transactions that you can identify) and then click this button. <application>&app;</application> will create a balancing entry for the remaining discrepancy that uses the <emphasis>Special Accounts:Orphan-XXX</emphasis> account (where "XXX" represents your currency). The Reconcile window will close; re-opening it will allow you to check the newly-created balancing entry and finish the process.</para></note>
<para>When you have marked off all the items on the bank statement and the difference is 0.00, press the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or
- select <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu.
+ select <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu.
The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window will close.
In the register window, the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field of the reconciled transactions will
change to <emphasis>y</emphasis>.</para>
@@ -819,14 +819,14 @@
as example, which is taken on the 28th of each month.</para>
<para>In <application>&app;</application>, there are two ways of creating scheduled transactions,
- <link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
+ <link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
<link linkend="txns-sxn-editor2">Scheduled Transactions Editor</link>.</para>
<sect2 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
<title>Creating from the Ledger</title>
<para>Enter the first occurrence of your to-schedule transaction in the
- ledger. In the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field for this transaction, type
+ ledger. In the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field for this transaction, type
<emphasis>Expenses:Internet</emphasis> as shown in the next screenshot.</para>
<screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-1">
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@
<guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel>, it may be faster if we have several
scheduled transactions to create at once.</para>
- <para>From the main accounts windows, select
+ <para>From the main accounts windows, select
<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
<guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>.
A new <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab will be opened in the
@@ -950,7 +950,7 @@
</screenshot>
<para>This tab contains a list, now empty, of all the scheduled
- transactions. Let’s create a new one by clicking on the <guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ transactions. Let’s create a new one by clicking on the <guibutton>New</guibutton>
button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. A window like the one below will pop up:</para>
<screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-overview">
@@ -979,13 +979,13 @@
transaction in the top of the window.</para>
<note>
<para>This name will only identify the transaction
- in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window,
+ in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window,
it will never appear in the ledger.</para>
</note>
<para>In the <guilabel>Options</guilabel> pane of the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel>
tab you have four options:</para>
-
+
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Enable</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
@@ -1007,23 +1007,23 @@
<para>Sets how many days in advance the transaction will be created.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Remind in advance</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets how many days in advance a reminder is presented. This
can be used, for example, when you have to pay something by check, and a reminder
one week before allows you to send your check before the deadline.</para>
</listitem>
- </varlistentry>
+ </varlistentry>
</variablelist>
- <para>The <guilabel>Occurences</guilabel> pane allows you to tell <application>&app;</application> that
+ <para>The <guilabel>Occurences</guilabel> pane allows you to tell <application>&app;</application> that
this scheduled transaction won’t last for ever. For example if you are repaying a loan,
you can enter the loan end date or the number of occurences left.</para>
-
+
<para>Select now the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window.
Here you can set the time-related options of the transaction.</para>
-
+
<screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-frequency">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject role="html">
@@ -1044,18 +1044,18 @@
<caption><para><guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> —
<guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
+ </screenshot>
+
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Frequency</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the basic frequency of the transaction, with options for <guilabel>once</guilabel>,
- <guilabel>daily</guilabel>, <guilabel>weekly</guilabel>, <guilabel>semi-monthly</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>daily</guilabel>, <guilabel>weekly</guilabel>, <guilabel>semi-monthly</guilabel> and
<guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.
In this example, this is set to <guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.</para>
<note>
<para>It is possible to set a transaction to occur at intervals <emphasis>other</emphasis> than
- those listed in the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> list, by changing the setting in the
+ those listed in the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> list, by changing the setting in the
<guilabel>Every</guilabel> control (see below).</para>
</note>
</listitem>
@@ -1067,36 +1067,36 @@
be set to the start of the next month.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Every</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option allows you to schedule transactions by multiplies of the value in
<guilabel>Frequency</guilabel>. For example, to create a transaction that runs every 3 weeks, set
- <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> to <guilabel>Weeks</guilabel> and <guilabel>Every</guilabel> to
+ <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> to <guilabel>Weeks</guilabel> and <guilabel>Every</guilabel> to
<guilabel>3</guilabel>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
-
+
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>On the</guilabel> and <guilabel>Except on weekends</guilabel></term>
<listitem>
- <para>Sets the day of the month that the transaction is scheduled, and controls what
+ <para>Sets the day of the month that the transaction is scheduled, and controls what
<application>&app;</application> will do when the day occurs on a weekend day.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
-
+
<note>
- <para>We know that the subscription is taken on the 28th each month, so the <guilabel>Start date</guilabel>
+ <para>We know that the subscription is taken on the 28th each month, so the <guilabel>Start date</guilabel>
will be November 1, 2003 (assuming November is the next month), the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> will be
- <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, it will be taken every month on the 28th. Since in our example the internet
+ <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, it will be taken every month on the 28th. Since in our example the internet
subscription is automatically taken from the account, we have no need to create it in advance, nor
give an end date.</para>
</note>
-
+
<para>When the elements on this tab are filled in, <application>&app;</application> will highlights the
calendar below to indicate when future transactions will be run.</para>
- <para>Finally select the <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab and enter your transaction
+ <para>Finally select the <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab and enter your transaction
in the lower part as you would do in the ledger, with the only difference of having no date.</para>
<para>Now, you should have a window like this:</para>
@@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@
<para>Remember to click on the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon, to validate and enter the
transaction.</para>
- <para>Now click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, it takes you to the <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab,
+ <para>Now click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, it takes you to the <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab,
now showing one item in the <guilabel>Transactions</guilabel> list:</para>
<screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-4">
@@ -1152,10 +1152,10 @@
<tip>
<para>If you click in the calendar part on the first day of one month, a
small window, following your mouse, will show you what is planned for
- this day. To make the small window dissapear again, just click in it
+ this day. To make the small window dissapear again, just click in it
one more time.</para>
</tip>
-
+
<para>You can now close the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> tab, and
<guilabel>save</guilabel> your work.</para>
@@ -1166,10 +1166,10 @@
supposed to run.</para>
</note>
- <para>From now on, when <application>&app;</application> is launched and a scheduled
- transaction is scheduled or need to be entered,
- you may see a <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window summarizing the scheduled transactions
- operations (<guilabel>Reminder</guilabel>, <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel> etc... a better
+ <para>From now on, when <application>&app;</application> is launched and a scheduled
+ transaction is scheduled or need to be entered,
+ you may see a <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window summarizing the scheduled transactions
+ operations (<guilabel>Reminder</guilabel>, <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel> etc... a better
description of each option can be found in the <application>&app;</application> manual):</para>
<screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-slr">
@@ -1197,12 +1197,12 @@
close the <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window and to apply the pending operations.
Select <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to skip entering in the ledger the pending operations.</para>
- <para>If the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> field was set to <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel>,
+ <para>If the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> field was set to <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel>,
then if you take a look in your bank account register, you’ll see the transaction has been created:</para>
-
+
<tip>
- <para>If you enable the <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel> option in the lower right of the
- <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window, <application>&app;</application> will open, after pressing
+ <para>If you enable the <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel> option in the lower right of the
+ <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window, <application>&app;</application> will open, after pressing
<guibutton>Ok</guibutton>, the register tab of each account where the scheduled
transactions were entered automatically.</para>
</tip>
@@ -1275,7 +1275,7 @@
balance to $1000, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
Remember, basic transactions transfer money from
a source account to a destination account. Record the transaction
- (press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
+ (press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1291,8 +1291,8 @@
starting balance to $500, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
This is done by entering the $500 as a <guilabel>charge</guilabel>
in the <emphasis>Visa</emphasis> account (or <guilabel>decrease</guilabel> in the <emphasis>Opening Balance</emphasis> account),
- since it is money you borrowed. Record the transaction (press the
- <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
+ since it is money you borrowed. Record the transaction (press the
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
diff --git a/guide/C/fdl-appendix.xml b/guide/C/fdl-appendix.xml
index c043d2c..7ec9e84 100644
--- a/guide/C/fdl-appendix.xml
+++ b/guide/C/fdl-appendix.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<!--
+<!--
The GNU Free Documentation License 1.1 in DocBook
Markup by Eric Baudais <baudais at okstate.edu>
Maintained by the GNOME Documentation Project
@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@
</copyright>
<legalnotice id="fdl-legalnotice">
<para>
- <address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>59 Temple Place,
- Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state>
- <postcode>02111-1307</postcode> <country>USA</country></address>
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
+ <address>Free Software Foundation, Inc. <street>59 Temple Place,
+ Suite 330</street>, <city>Boston</city>, <state>MA</state>
+ <postcode>02111-1307</postcode> <country>USA</country></address>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
</para>
</legalnotice>
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@
their work, while not being considered responsible for
modifications made by others.
</para>
-
+
<para>
This License is a kind of <quote>copyleft</quote>, which means
that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in
the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License,
which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
</para>
-
+
<para>
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
@@ -68,14 +68,14 @@
work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed
as <quote>you</quote>.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-modified">
A <quote>Modified Version</quote> of the Document means any work
containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied
verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another
language.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-secondary">
A <quote>Secondary Section</quote> is a named appendix or a
front-matter section of the <link
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
License.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-cover-texts">
The <quote>Cover Texts</quote> are certain short passages of
text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts,
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> is released under this
License.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-transparent">
A <quote>Transparent</quote> copy of the <link
linkend="fdl-document"> Document</link> means a machine-readable
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
that is not <quote>Transparent</quote> is called
<quote>Opaque</quote>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include
plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@
machine-generated <acronym>HTML</acronym> produced by some word processors for
output purposes only.
</para>
-
+
<para id="fdl-title-page">
The <quote>Title Page</quote> means, for a printed book, the
title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
beginning of the body of the text.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section2">
<title>2. VERBATIM COPYING</title>
<para>
@@ -165,13 +165,13 @@
must also follow the conditions in <link
linkend="fdl-section3">section 3</link>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated
above, and you may publicly display copies.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section3">
<title>3. COPYING IN QUANTITY</title>
<para>
@@ -191,14 +191,14 @@
conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other
respects.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
adjacent pages.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If you publish or distribute <link
linkend="fdl-transparent">Opaque</link> copies of the <link
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@
or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the
public.
</para>
-
+
<para>
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors
of the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> well before
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@
to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section4">
<title>4. MODIFICATIONS</title>
<para>
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do
these things in the Modified Version:
</para>
-
+
<itemizedlist mark="opencircle">
<listitem>
<formalpara>
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>B</title>
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>C</title>
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>D</title>
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>E</title>
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>F</title>
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>G</title>
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>H</title>
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>I</title>
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>J</title>
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>K</title>
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>L</title>
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>M</title>
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@
</para>
</formalpara>
</listitem>
-
+
<listitem>
<formalpara>
<title>N</title>
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@
</formalpara>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+
<para>
If the <link linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version</link>
includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@
Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be
distinct from any other section titles.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may add a section entitled <quote>Endorsements</quote>,
provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your <link
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
definition of a standard.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may add a passage of up to five words as a <link
linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Front-Cover Text</link>, and a passage
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@
replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
publisher that added the old one.
</para>
-
+
<para>
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the <link
linkend="fdl-document">Document</link> do not by this License
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@
linkend="fdl-modified">Modified Version </link>.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section5">
<title>5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS</title>
<para>
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@
and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in
its license notice.
</para>
-
+
<para>
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License,
and multiple identical <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@
list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined
work.
</para>
-
+
<para>
In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
<quote>History</quote> in the various original documents,
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@
delete all sections entitled <quote>Endorsements.</quote>
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section6">
<title>6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS</title>
<para>
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
documents in all other respects.
</para>
-
+
<para>
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@
copying of that document.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section7">
<title>7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS</title>
<para>
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@
aggregate.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section8">
<title>8. TRANSLATION</title>
<para>
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@
the original English version will prevail.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section9">
<title>9. TERMINATION</title>
<para>
@@ -589,7 +589,7 @@
parties remain in full compliance.
</para>
</sect1>
-
+
<sect1 id="fdl-section10">
<title>10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE</title>
<para>
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@
type="http"
url="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</ulink>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the <link linkend="fdl-document">Document</link>
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@
the License in the document and put the following copyright and
license notices just after the title page:
</para>
-
+
<blockquote>
<para>
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME.
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@
License</quote>.
</para>
</blockquote>
-
+
<para>
If you have no <link linkend="fdl-invariant">Invariant
Sections</link>, write <quote>with no Invariant Sections</quote>
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@
<quote>Front-Cover Texts being LIST</quote>; likewise for <link
linkend="fdl-cover-texts">Back-Cover Texts</link>.
</para>
-
+
<para>
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code,
we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your
@@ -662,6 +662,6 @@
License</ulink>, to permit their use in free software.
</para>
</sect1>
-</appendix>
+</appendix>
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index af1a542..e2c62fc 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -119,12 +119,12 @@
<year>2003-2004</year>
<holder>Jon Lapham</holder>
</copyright>
-
+
<copyright>
<year>2002</year>
<holder>Chris Lyttle</holder>
</copyright>
-
+
<copyright>
<year>2001</year>
<holder>Carol Champagne and Chris Lyttle</holder>
Summary of changes:
guide/C/appendixa.xml | 8 +-
guide/C/appendixb.xml | 2 +-
guide/C/appendixc.xml | 4 +-
guide/C/appendixd.xml | 2 +-
guide/C/ch_accts.xml | 52 ++--
guide/C/ch_basics.xml | 186 +++++++-------
guide/C/ch_budgets.xml | 10 +-
guide/C/ch_bus_ap.xml | 36 +--
guide/C/ch_bus_ar.xml | 12 +-
guide/C/ch_bus_intro.xml | 14 +-
guide/C/ch_bus_pay.xml | 16 +-
guide/C/ch_bus_setup.xml | 70 +++---
guide/C/ch_capgain.xml | 14 +-
guide/C/ch_cbook.xml | 130 +++++-----
guide/C/ch_cc.xml | 50 ++--
guide/C/ch_currency.xml | 74 +++---
guide/C/ch_expenses.xml | 78 +++---
guide/C/ch_import_business_data.xml | 24 +-
guide/C/ch_invest.xml | 72 +++---
guide/C/ch_loans.xml | 70 +++---
guide/C/ch_oth_assets.xml | 2 +-
guide/C/ch_oview.xml | 10 +-
guide/C/ch_reports.xml | 380 ++++++++++++++--------------
guide/C/ch_txns.xml | 230 ++++++++---------
guide/C/fdl-appendix.xml | 104 ++++----
guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml | 4 +-
help/C/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml | 108 ++++----
help/C/Help_ch_Business.xml | 334 ++++++++++++------------
help/C/Help_ch_Customize.xml | 488 ++++++++++++++++++------------------
help/C/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml | 32 +--
help/C/Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml | 10 +-
help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml | 2 +-
help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml | 144 +++++------
help/C/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml | 110 ++++----
help/C/Help_ch_Transactions.xml | 72 +++---
help/C/Help_chartofaccts.xml | 92 +++----
help/C/Help_fdl-appendix.xml | 104 ++++----
help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml | 14 +-
help/C/Help_txf-categories.xml | 2 +-
39 files changed, 1583 insertions(+), 1583 deletions(-)
More information about the gnucash-changes
mailing list